E-ClassSedan and WagonOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 3564 13 Part no. 212 584 51 00 Edition B 2014

É2125845100{ËÍ2125845100

E-Clas

sSedan

andW

agon

Opera

tor'sMa

nual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark ofHarman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® areregistered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark ofiBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands areregistered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes draw your attention to hazardsthat endanger your health or life, or the healthor life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

DisplayDisplay This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 22.11.2012

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow theinstructions and warning notices in thismanual. Ignoring them could result in damageto the vehicle or personal injury to you orothers.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2125845100 É2125845100{ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 22

At a glance ........................................... 29

Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 107

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 127

Climate control ................................. 143

Driving and parking .......................... 157

On-board computer and displays .... 237

Stowage and features ...................... 297

Maintenance and care ...................... 335

Breakdown assistance ..................... 351

Wheels and tires ............................... 371

Technical data ................................... 415

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...115 V socket ...................................... 32112 V socket

see Sockets360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 346Function/notes ............................. 220

4ETSsee ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 208

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 258Function/notes ................................ 67Important safety notes .................... 67Warning lamp ................................. 288

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 149Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 248Display message ............................ 276Function/information .................... 230

Active Driving Assistance package . 230Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 248Display message ............................ 275Function/information .................... 233

Active light function ......................... 133Active multicontour seat

Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 113Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 213Display message ............................ 276Exiting a parking space .................. 215Function/notes ............................. 212Important safety notes .................. 212Parking .......................................... 214

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 75Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 71Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 205

Adaptive Highbeam AssistDisplay message ............................ 269Function/notes ............................. 133Switching on/off ........................... 134

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 422Air bags

Display message ............................ 265Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 44Important safety notes .................... 42Knee bag .......................................... 45PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 48Pelvis air bag ................................... 46Safety guidelines ............................. 41Side impact air bag .......................... 45Window curtain air bag .................... 47

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air filter (display message) .............. 272AIRMATIC

Display message ............................ 273Function/notes ............................. 204

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 156Important safety notes .................. 155Rear ............................................... 156Setting ........................................... 155Setting the center air vents ........... 155Setting the side air vents ............... 155

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 250Setting the color (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 250

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ................................................ 206Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-theft alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 318Assistance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 246

4 Index

Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 246ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 341Hiding a service message .............. 341Notes ............................................. 340Resetting the service intervaldisplay ........................................... 341Service message ............................ 340Special service requirements ......... 341

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 78Function ........................................... 78Switching off the alarm .................... 78

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 248Display message ............................ 273Function/notes ............................. 225

Audio systemsee separate operating instructions

Authorized Centerssee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopssee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 269see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 164Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 163Automatic headlamp mode .............. 129Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 172Changing gear ............................... 170DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 168Display message ............................ 282Drive program display .................... 168Driving tips .................................... 170Emergency running mode .............. 175Engaging drive position .................. 170Engaging neutral ............................ 169Engaging park position (AMGvehicles) ........................................ 169Engaging reverse gear ................... 169Engaging the park position ............ 168

Kickdown ....................................... 171Manual drive program .................... 172Manual drive program (AMGvehicles) ........................................ 173Overview ........................................ 167Problem (malfunction) ................... 175Program selector button ................ 171Pulling away ................................... 162Selector lever ................................ 167Starting the engine ........................ 161Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 172Transmission position display ........ 167Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 168Transmission positions .................. 170

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 175

BBag hook ............................................ 306BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 68BAS PLUS Q (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Important safety notes .................... 69Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 85Important safety notes .................... 85Replacing ......................................... 85

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 360Display message ............................ 271Important safety notes .................. 358Jump starting ................................. 362

Belt force limiterActivation ......................................... 59Function ........................................... 59

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 248Display message ............................ 276Notes/function .............................. 226see Active Blind Spot Assist

BlueTECAdding DEF .................................... 180

BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 421

Index 5

Bottle holder ...................................... 316Box (trunk) ......................................... 309Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 260Notes ............................................. 423

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 267

BrakesABS .................................................. 67Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 71BAS .................................................. 68BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist . 68Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 423Display message ............................ 258Driving tips .................................... 186High-performance brake system .... 187HOLD function ............................... 202Important safety notes .................. 186Maintenance .................................. 187Parking brake ................................ 183Warning lamp ................................. 287

Breakdownsee Flat tire

Bulbssee Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retailcustomers and lessees .................... 24

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

Care360° camera ................................. 346Carpets .......................................... 349Car wash ........................................ 342Display ........................................... 347Exhaust pipe .................................. 347Exterior lights ................................ 345Gear or selector lever .................... 347Interior ........................................... 347Matte finish ................................... 344Notes ............................................. 341

Paint .............................................. 344Plastic trim .................................... 347Power washer ................................ 343Rear view camera .......................... 346Roof lining ...................................... 349Seat belt ........................................ 348Seat cover ..................................... 348Sensors ......................................... 346Steering wheel ............................... 347Trim pieces .................................... 348Washing by hand ........................... 343Wheels ........................................... 344Windows ........................................ 345Wiper blades .................................. 345Wooden trim .................................. 348

Cargo compartment cover ............... 307Cargo compartment enlargement . . . 304Cargo compartment floor ................. 313Cargo net

Attaching ....................................... 309Important safety information ......... 309

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 306Car keys

see SmartKeyCar wash (care) ................................. 342CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 244Center console

Lower section .................................. 35Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 36Upper section .................................. 34

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 251Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 82

Changing bulbsHigh-beam headlamps ................... 137Turn signals (front) ......................... 138

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 65Rear doors ....................................... 66

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 60Restraint systems ............................ 60Special seat belt retractor ............... 63

6 Index

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 63Top Tether ....................................... 64

Cigarette lighter ................................ 319Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 345Climate control

Automatic climate control (3-zone) 147Controlling automatically ............... 150Cooling with air dehumidification . . 149Defrosting the windows ................. 153Defrosting the windshield .............. 152Dual-zone automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 145Important safety notes .................. 144Indicator lamp ................................ 150Information about using dual-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 146Information on using dual-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 148Maximum cooling .......................... 153Overview of systems ...................... 144Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 150Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 154Rear control panel ......................... 147Refrigerant ..................................... 425Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 425Setting the air distribution ............. 151Setting the airflow ......................... 152Setting the air vents ...................... 155Setting the climate mode ............... 150Setting the temperature ................ 151Setting the temperature with 3-zone automatic climate control ..... 151Setting the temperaturewith dual-zone automatic climate control ..... 151Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 154Switching on/off ........................... 148Switching residual heat on/off ...... 154Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 153Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 152

Coat hooks ......................................... 309

CockpitOverview .......................................... 30see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheelInflating ......................................... 412see Emergency spare wheel

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating thedistance warning function .............. 247Display message ............................ 261Operation/notes .............................. 70

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 347

Combination switch .......................... 131Combined cargo cover and net ........ 308Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 241Convenience box ............................... 309Convenience closing feature .............. 99Convenience opening feature ............ 99Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 339Display message ............................ 269Filling capacity ............................... 424Important safety notes .................. 423Temperature (on-board computer) . 253Temperature gauge ........................ 238Warning lamp ................................. 293

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 28Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 266Function/notes ............................. 133

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ............................................... 136Cruise control

Activation conditions ..................... 190Cruise control lever ....................... 190Deactivating ................................... 191Display message ............................ 279Driving system ............................... 189Function/notes ............................. 189Important safety notes .................. 189

Index 7

Setting a speed .............................. 191Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 190

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 316Important safety notes .................. 316Rear compartment ......................... 316

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 27Customer Relations Department ....... 27

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 268Function/notes ............................. 129Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 250

Dealershipssee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 26DEF

Adding ........................................... 180Display message ............................ 273Filling capacity ............................... 422Important safety notes .................. 421

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 251Interior lighting .............................. 251

Diagnostics connection ...................... 26Diesel .................................................. 420Digital speedometer ......................... 242DIRECT SELECT lever

see Automatic transmissionDisplay messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 340Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 257Driving systems ............................. 273Engine ............................................ 269General notes ................................ 257Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 257KEYLESS-GO .................................. 284

Lights ............................................. 266Safety systems .............................. 258SmartKey ....................................... 284Tires ............................................... 280Vehicle ........................................... 282

Distance recorder ............................. 241Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 295Distance warning function

Activating/deactivating ................. 247Function/notes ................................ 70

DISTRONIC PLUSActivating ....................................... 194Activation conditions ..................... 194Deactivating ................................... 198Display message ............................ 277Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 197Function/notes ............................. 191Important safety notes .................. 192Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 196Warning lamp ................................. 295

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 251Automatic locking (switch) ............... 89Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 82Control panel ................................... 38Display message ............................ 283Emergency locking ........................... 90Emergency unlocking ....................... 90Important safety notes .................... 88Opening (from inside) ...................... 88

Drinking and driving ......................... 184Drinks holder

see Cup holderDrive program

Automatic ...................................... 172Display ........................................... 167Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 168Manual ........................................... 172Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 173SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 254

Drive program selector ..................... 171Driver's door

see Doors

8 Index

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 341Symmetrical low beam .................. 128

Driving on flooded roads .................. 188Driving safety system

BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist . 68Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 67ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 75Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 71BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 70Distance warning function ............... 70Electronic brake force distribution ... 75ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 72ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 72Important safety information ........... 67Overview .......................................... 67PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 76STEER CONTROL ............................. 78

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 220Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 230Active Driving Assistance package 230Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 233Active Parking Assist ..................... 212AIRMATIC ...................................... 204AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 206ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 225Blind Spot Assist ............................ 226Cruise control ................................ 189Display message ............................ 273DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist ............................................. 200HOLD function ............................... 202Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 228Lane Tracking package .................. 226PARKTRONIC ................................. 208RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 203Rear view camera .......................... 217

Driving tipsAMG ceramic brakes ..................... 187Automatic transmission ................. 170Brakes ........................................... 186

Break-in period .............................. 158Downhill gradient ........................... 186Drinking and driving ....................... 184Driving abroad ............................... 128Driving in winter ............................. 188Driving on flooded roads ................ 188Driving on wet roads ...................... 188Exhaust check ............................... 184Fuel ................................................ 184General .......................................... 184Hydroplaning ................................. 188Icy road surfaces ........................... 189Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 186Snow chains .................................. 375Symmetrical low beam .................. 128Wet road surface ........................... 186

DVD audioOperating (on-board computer) ..... 244

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 245

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 252Function/notes ............................. 121

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 122Function/notes ............................. 121Switching on/off ........................... 252

EASY-PACK cargo compartmentmanagement system ........................ 311EASY-PACK folding floor

Important safety notes .................. 313EASY-PACK folding luggage-compartment floor

Opening and closing ...................... 313EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Components and storage .............. 311Inserting the brackets into theloading rail ..................................... 311

EASY-PACK rear sill protector .......... 314EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 309EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 260Function/notes ................................ 75

Index 9

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 185On-board computer ....................... 242

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 164Automatic engine switch-off .......... 163Deactivating/activating ................. 164General information ....................... 163Important safety notes .................. 163Introduction ................................... 163

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 90Fuel filler flap ................................. 177Trunk ............................................... 97Vehicle ............................................. 90

Emergency spare wheelImportant safety notes .................. 410Points to remember ....................... 410Removing ....................................... 411Storage location ............................ 411Stowing .......................................... 412Technical data ............................... 414

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 59Safety guidelines ............................. 41

Emergency unlockingTailgate ............................................ 97

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 23

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 292Display message ............................ 269ECO start/stop function ................ 163Engine number ............................... 417Irregular running ............................ 166Jump-starting ................................. 362Starting problems .......................... 166Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 161Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 161Switching off .................................. 182Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 367

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 166

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 338Additives ........................................ 422Checking the oil level ..................... 337Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 338Display message ............................ 271Filling capacity ............................... 422Notes about oil grades ................... 422Notes on oil level/consumption .... 337Temperature (on-board computer) . 253Viscosity ........................................ 423

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 254Deactivating/activating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 74Deactivating/activating (exceptAMG vehicles) ................................ 247Deactivating/activating (notes;except AMG vehicles) ...................... 73Display message ............................ 258ETS/4ETS ........................................ 72Function/notes ................................ 72General notes .................................. 72Important safety information ........... 72Warning lamp ................................. 289

ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ................................................ 72Exhaust check ................................... 184Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 347Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 128see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 122Dipping (automatic) ....................... 124Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 123Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 123Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 252Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 124Setting ........................................... 123Storing settings (memory function) 125Storing the parking position .......... 124

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 299

10 Index

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFirst-aid kit ......................................... 352Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 354Preparing the vehicle ..................... 354TIREFIT kit ...................................... 355

Floormats ........................................... 334Folding bench seat (cargocompartment) .................................... 114Fuel

Additives ........................................ 420Consumption statistics .................. 241Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 242Displaying the range ...................... 242Driving tips .................................... 184Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 420Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Grade (gasoline) ............................ 419Important safety notes .................. 418Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 419Problem (malfunction) ................... 179Quality (diesel) ............................... 420Refueling ........................................ 175Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 419

Fuel filler flapEmergency release ........................ 177Opening/closing ............................ 176

Fuel filter (display message) ............ 272Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 242

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 419Problem (malfunction) ................... 179

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 352Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 367Before changing ............................. 367Fuse box in the cargocompartment ................................. 369Fuse box in the enginecompartment ................................. 368

Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 368Important safety notes .................. 367

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 333Important safety notes .................. 331Opening/closing the garage door .. 333Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 331

Gear indicator (on-board computer) 253Genuine parts ...................................... 22Glove box ........................................... 299

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 93Hazard warning lamps ...................... 132Head bags

Display message ............................ 263Headlamps

Fogging up ..................................... 135see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ....................................... 110Adjusting (angle) ............................ 111Adjusting (electrically) ................... 111Adjusting (rear) .............................. 112Installing/removing (rear) .............. 112Luxury ............................................ 111

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 137Display message ............................ 267Switching on/off ........................... 132

Hill start assist .................................. 162HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 202Deactivating ................................... 203Display message ............................ 274Function/notes ............................. 202

HoodClosing ........................................... 337Display message ............................ 283

Index 11

Important safety notes .................. 336Opening ......................................... 336

Hydroplaning ..................................... 188

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 78Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsInsect protection on the radiator .... 337Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 31Settings ......................................... 249Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 250Interior lighting ................................. 135

Automatic control .......................... 136Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 251Emergency lighting ........................ 136Manual control ............................... 136Overview ........................................ 135Reading lamp ................................. 135Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 250Setting the brightness of thedisplay/switch (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 250Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 250

JJack

Storage location ............................ 352Using ............................................. 397

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 362

KKEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature .......... 100Display message ............................ 284Locking ............................................ 83Start/Stop button .......................... 159

Starting the engine ........................ 161Unlocking ......................................... 83

Key positionsKEYLESS-GO .................................. 159SmartKey ....................................... 159

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 171Manual drive program .................... 174

Knee bag .............................................. 45

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 248Display message ............................ 275Function/information .................... 228

Lane Tracking package ..................... 226Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 254LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 63License plate lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 267Light function, active

Display message ............................ 268Lighting

Light switch ................................... 128Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 251Active light function ....................... 133Automatic headlamp mode ............ 129Cornering light function ................. 133Driving abroad ............................... 128Hazard warning lamps ................... 132High beam flasher .......................... 132High-beam headlamps ................... 132Low-beam headlamps .................... 130Parking lamps ................................ 130Rear fog lamp ................................ 130Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 250Setting the brightness of thedisplay/switch (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 250

12 Index

Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 250Standing lamps .............................. 131Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board computer) 250Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 251Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 251Turn signals ................................... 131see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Light sensor (display message) ....... 269Loading guidelines ............................ 298Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 89Emergency locking ........................... 90From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 89

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 252Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 266Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................. 128Switching on/off ........................... 130

Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load-securing kit) ....................................... 311Lumbar support

Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport .......................................... 114

Luxury head restraints ..................... 111

MM+S tires ............................................ 374Malfunction message

see Display messagesMassage function (PULSE) ............... 113Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 344mbrace

Call priority .................................... 326Display message ............................ 261

Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 326Downloading routes ....................... 330Emergency call .............................. 323General notes ................................ 322Geo fencing ................................... 330Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 328MB info call button ........................ 325Remote vehicle locking .................. 328Roadside Assistance button .......... 325Search & Send ............................... 327Self-test ......................................... 323Speed alert .................................... 330System .......................................... 323Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 330Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 329Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 328

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 84Locking vehicle ................................ 90Unlocking the driver's door .............. 90

Memory card (audio) ......................... 244Memory function ............................... 125Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 257Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 245

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 83MOExtended tires .............................. 354Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 400Mounting a new wheel ................... 399Raising the vehicle ......................... 397Removing a wheel .......................... 399Securing the vehicle againstrolling away ................................... 396

MP3Operation ....................................... 244see separate operating instructions

Index 13

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 240Permanent display ......................... 249

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 239Overview .......................................... 33

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 243NECK-PRO head restraints

Operation ......................................... 53Resetting after being triggered ........ 54

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsOperation ......................................... 53Resetting after being triggered ........ 54

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 158

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 52Operation ......................................... 48System self-test ............................... 50

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 60Important safety notes .................... 40

OCSFaults ............................................... 52Operation ......................................... 48System self-test ............................... 50

Odometer ........................................... 241Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 253Assistance menu ........................... 246Audio menu ................................... 244Convenience submenu .................. 252Displaying a service message ........ 341Display messages .......................... 257DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 197Factory settings submenu ............. 253Important safety notes .................. 238Instrument cluster submenu .......... 249Lighting submenu .......................... 250

Menu overview .............................. 241Message memory .......................... 257Navigation menu ............................ 243Operation ....................................... 239RACETIMER ................................... 254Service menu ................................. 249Settings menu ............................... 249Standard display ............................ 241Telephone menu ............................ 245Trip menu ...................................... 241Vehicle submenu ........................... 251Video DVD operation ..................... 245

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 26Important safety notes .................... 25

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 23

Outside temperature display ........... 239Overhead control panel ...................... 37Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 66

PPaint code number ............................ 416Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 344Panic alarm .......................................... 40Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening/closing ............................ 104Opening/closing the rollersunblind ......................................... 105Problem (malfunction) ................... 106Resetting ....................................... 105

Panorama sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................. 102

Parking ............................................... 182Important safety notes .................. 182Parking brake ................................ 183Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 124Rear view camera .......................... 217see PARKTRONIC

14 Index

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 212see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 260Notes/function .............................. 183Warning lamp ................................. 287

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 130

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 211Driving system ............................... 208Function/notes ............................. 208Important safety notes .................. 208Problem (malfunction) ................... 212Range of the sensors ..................... 209Warning display ............................. 210

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFProblem (malfunction) ..................... 52Problems (malfunction) .................. 265

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 48Plastic hooks ..................................... 306Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 347Power washers .................................. 343Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 261Operation ......................................... 54

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 247Display message ............................ 261Function/notes ................................ 76Important safety notes .................... 76Warning lamp ................................. 295

Program selector button .................. 171Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 22Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 162

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 26

RRACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 203RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 254Radiator cover ................................... 337Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 244see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 26Reading lamp ..................................... 135Rear compartment

Setting the airflow ......................... 152Setting the air vents ...................... 156Setting the temperature ................ 151

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 267Switching on/off ........................... 130

Rear seatsDisplay message ............................ 283Folding the backrest forwards/back ............................................... 303

Rear sill protector ............................. 314Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 346Function/notes ............................. 217Switching on/off ........................... 217

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 122Dipping (automatic) ....................... 124

Rear window blind ............................ 318Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 154Switching on/off ........................... 153

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade .............. 141Switching on/off ........................... 139

Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem)

Important safety notes .................. 425Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 31Important safety notes .................. 175Refueling process .......................... 176see Fuel

Index 15

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 331Programming (garage door opener) 331

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 137Overview of bulb types .................. 137

Reporting safety defects .................... 27Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 272Warning lamp ................................. 292see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 154Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reverse gearEngaging (automatic transmission) 167

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof .............. 103Roller sunblinds ............................. 104Side windows ................................... 98Sliding sunroof ............................... 103Trunk lid/tailgate ............................. 91

Reversing lamps (display message) 268Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 24Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel .................................. 104Rear side windows ......................... 318Rear window .................................. 318

Roof carrier ........................................ 314Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 349Roof load (maximum) ........................ 426

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 60Child restraint systems .................... 60Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 48

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 57Adjusting the height ......................... 58Belt force limiters ............................ 59center rear-compartment seat ......... 58Cleaning ......................................... 348Correct usage .................................. 56Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 59Fastening ......................................... 56Important safety guidelines ............. 55Releasing ......................................... 58Safety guidelines ............................. 41Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 252Warning lamp ................................. 285Warning lamp (function) ................... 58

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 110Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport .......................................... 114Adjusting the active multicontourseat ............................................... 113Adjusting the head restraint .......... 110Cleaning the cover ......................... 348Correct driver's seat position ........ 108Folding the backrest (rearcompartment) forwards/back ....... 305Important safety notes .................. 109Massage function .......................... 113Overview ........................................ 109Seat heating problem .................... 118Seat ventilation problem ................ 119Storing settings (memory function) 125Switching seat heating on/off ....... 116Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 118

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 347

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 346Service menu (on-board computer) . 249Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 423Coolant (engine) ............................ 423DEF special additives ..................... 421Engine oil ....................................... 422Fuel ................................................ 418Important safety notes .................. 418

16 Index

Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 425Washer fluid ................................... 424

Service worksee ASSYST PLUS

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 253On-board computer ....................... 249

Setting the air distribution ............... 151Setting the airflow ............................ 152SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 254Side impact air bag ............................. 45Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 268Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 345Convenience closing feature ............ 99Convenience opening feature .......... 99Important safety information ........... 98Opening/closing .............................. 99Problem (malfunction) ................... 102Resetting ....................................... 101

Skibag ................................................ 301Sliding sunroof

Important safety notes .................. 102Opening/closing ............................ 103Problem (malfunction) ................... 106Resetting ....................................... 104see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 85Changing the programming ............. 83Checking the battery ....................... 85Convenience closing feature .......... 100Convenience opening feature .......... 99Display message ............................ 284Door central locking/unlocking ....... 82Important safety notes .................... 82Loss ................................................. 87Mechanical key ................................ 84Overview .......................................... 82Positions (ignition lock) ................. 159Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87Starting the engine ........................ 161

Snow chains ...................................... 375

SocketsCenter console .............................. 320General notes ................................ 320Luggage compartment ................... 320Rear compartment ......................... 320

Spare wheelStowing .......................................... 412

Specialist workshop ............................ 26Special seat belt retractor .................. 63Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 242In the Instrument cluster ................. 31Segments ...................................... 239Selecting the unit of measurement 249see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 74Warning lamp ................................. 290

SRSsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 262Introduction ..................................... 41Warning lamp ................................. 291Warning lamp (function) ................... 41

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 268Switching on/off ........................... 131

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 161STEER CONTROL .................................. 78Steering (display message) .............. 283Steering Assist (DISTRONIC PLUS)

Activating/deactivating ................. 248Display message ............................ 279

Steering wheelAdjusting (electrically) ................... 119Button overview ............................... 33Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 239Cleaning ......................................... 347Important safety notes .................. 119

Index 17

Paddle shifters ............................... 172Steering wheel heating .................. 120Storing settings (memory function) 125

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 121Switching on/off ........................... 120

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 172Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 254Stowage areas ................................... 298Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 300Center console .............................. 299Cup holders ................................... 316Eyeglasses compartment ............... 299Glove box ....................................... 299Important safety information ......... 298Rear ............................................... 300Stowage net ................................... 301Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 300

Stowage net ....................................... 301Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 312Summer tires ..................................... 374Sun visor ............................................ 317Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 251Suspension tuning

AIRMATIC ...................................... 205AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 206SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 254

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 154Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 78

TTachometer ........................................ 238Tailgate

Display message ............................ 282Emergency unlocking ....................... 97Important safety notes .................... 90Limiting the opening angle ............... 96Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 95Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 92

Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 92Opening dimensions ...................... 426

Tail lampsDisplay message ............................ 267

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 31

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 418Emergency spare wheel ................. 414Information .................................... 416Tires/wheels ................................. 400Vehicle data ................................... 426

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 326Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 326Downloading routes ....................... 330Emergency call .............................. 323Geo fencing ................................... 330Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 328MB info call button ........................ 325Remote vehicle locking .................. 328Roadside Assistance button .......... 325Search & Send ............................... 327Self-test ......................................... 323Speed alert .................................... 330System .......................................... 323Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 330Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 329Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 328

Tele AidGeneral notes ................................ 322

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 245Display message ............................ 283Menu (on-board computer) ............ 245Number from the phone book ........ 245Redialing ........................................ 246Rejecting/ending a call ................. 245

Telescopic rod (EASY-PACK load-securing kit) ....................................... 312Temperature

Coolant .......................................... 238Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 253Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 253Outside temperature ...................... 239Setting (climate control) ................ 151

18 Index

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78Immobilizer ...................................... 78

Through-loading ................................ 303Through-loading feature ................... 303Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 254TIREFIT kit .......................................... 355Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 380Checking manually ........................ 379Display message ............................ 280Important safety notes .................. 380Maximum ....................................... 378Notes ............................................. 377Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 356Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 357Recommended ............................... 376

Tire pressure loss warningsystem

General notes ................................ 379Important safety notes .................. 379Restarting ...................................... 380

Tire pressure monitoring systemChecking the tire pressureelectronically ................................. 382Function/notes ............................. 380General notes ................................ 380Important safety notes .................. 381Restarting ...................................... 383Warning lamp ................................. 296Warning message .......................... 382

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 394Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 393Bar (definition) ............................... 392Changing a wheel .......................... 395Characteristics .............................. 392Checking ........................................ 373Definition of terms ......................... 392Direction of rotation ...................... 395Display message ............................ 280Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 395DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 392DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 393

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 393GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 393GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 393Important safety notes .................. 372Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 393Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 393Labeling (overview) ........................ 389Load bearing index (definition) ...... 394Load index ..................................... 391Load index (definition) ................... 393Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 393Maximum load on a tire (definition) 394Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 394Maximum tire load ......................... 391Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 394MOExtended tires .......................... 374Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 394PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 394Replacing ....................................... 395Service life ..................................... 374Sidewall (definition) ....................... 394Speed rating (definition) ................ 393Storing ........................................... 395Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 392Temperature .................................. 388TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 394Tire bead (definition) ...................... 394Tire pressure (definition) ................ 394Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 393Tire size (data) ............................... 400Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 389Tire tread ....................................... 373Tire tread (definition) ..................... 394Total load limit (definition) ............. 395Traction ......................................... 388Traction (definition) ....................... 394Tread wear ..................................... 388

Index 19

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 387Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 393Unladen weight (definition) ............ 394Wear indicator (definition) ............. 394Wheel rim (definition) .................... 393see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 64Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 364Installing the towing eye ................ 365Removing the towing eye ............... 366With the rear axle raised ................ 366

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 366

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 367Important safety notes .................. 364

Transfer case ..................................... 175Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 168Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 168Transporting the vehicle .................. 366Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 348Trip computer (on-board computer) 241Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 241Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 242

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 97Locking separately ........................... 96Opening/closing (from outside,HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 93

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 282Opening dimensions ...................... 426

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 426Turn signals

Changing bulbs (front) ................... 138Display message ............................ 266Switching on/off ........................... 131

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 90From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 89

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 317Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 27Data acquisition ............................... 28Display message ............................ 282Equipment ....................................... 23Individual settings .......................... 249Limited Warranty ............................. 27Loading .......................................... 383Locking (in an emergency) ............... 90Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 82Lowering ........................................ 400Maintenance .................................... 24Parking for a long period ................ 183Pulling away ................................... 162Raising ........................................... 397Reporting problems ......................... 27Securing from rolling away ............ 396Towing away .................................. 364Transporting .................................. 366Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 90Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 82Vehicle data ................................... 426

Vehicle data ....................................... 426Vehicle dimensions ........................... 426Vehicle emergency locking ................ 90Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 416Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 204Vehicle level (display message) ....... 273Vehicle tool kit .................................. 352Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 245VIN ...................................................... 416

20 Index

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 288Brakes ........................................... 287Check Engine ................................. 292Coolant .......................................... 293Distance warning ........................... 295DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 295ESP® .............................................. 289ESP® OFF ....................................... 290Fuel tank ........................................ 292Overview .......................................... 32PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 48Reserve fuel ................................... 292Seat belt ........................................ 285SPORT handling mode ................... 290SRS ................................................ 291Tire pressure monitor .................... 296

Warranty ............................................ 416Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 283Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 400Wheel chock ...................................... 396Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 395Checking ........................................ 373Cleaning ......................................... 344Cleaning (warning) ......................... 395Emergency spare wheel ................. 410Important safety notes .................. 372Interchanging/changing ................ 395Mounting a new wheel ................... 399Mounting a wheel .......................... 396Removing a wheel .......................... 399Storing ........................................... 395Tightening torque ........................... 400Wheel size/tire size ....................... 400

Window curtain air bagOperation ......................................... 47

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 152

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 340Notes ............................................. 424

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 142Rear window wiper ........................ 139Replacing the wiper blades ............ 139Switching on/off ........................... 138

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 374Slippery road surfaces ................... 189Snow chains .................................. 375

Winter operationRadiator cover ............................... 337

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 374

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 345Important safety notes .................. 139Replacing (rear window) ................ 141Replacing (windshield) ................... 140

Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 348Workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 152

Index 21

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one ofcomprehensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuelconsumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuelconsumption.

Environmental concerns andrecommendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try toregenerate or re-use them. Observe therelevant environmental rules and regulationswhen disposing of materials. In this way youwill help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems,may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.

22 Introduction

Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has beenspecifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benzparts for necessary service and repair work.In addition, strategically located partsdelivery centers provide quick and reliableparts service.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 416) when orderinggenuine Mercedes-Benz parts.

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Bear in mind that your vehicle maynot feature all functions described here. Thisalso applies to safety-relevant systems andfunctions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Introduction 23

Z

Information for customers inCaliforniaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or

malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directlynotified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified us in writing of the need for itsrepair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.

24 Introduction

If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any requiredrepairs carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of othernetworked components. In particular,systems relevant to safety could also beaffected. As a result, these may no longerfunction as intended and/or jeopardize theoperating safety of the vehicle. There is anincreased risk of an accident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.a curb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

Introduction 25

Z

In situations like this, the body, theundercarriage, chassis parts, wheels ortires could be damaged without thedamage being visible. Componentsdamaged in this way can unexpectedly failor, in the case of an accident, no longerwithstand the strain they are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system for anextended period, they can catch fire.In such cases, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. If on continuing yourjourney you notice that driving safety isimpaired, pull over and stop the vehicleimmediately, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions. In such cases, visit aqualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,

including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to adiagnostics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connectionis used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions testduring the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools and

26 Introduction

qualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work andmodificationsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information whendriving your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by the

Introduction 27

Z

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Please note that your vehicle is equipped withdevices that can record vehicle systems data.If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace(Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in theevent of an accident.This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access these data and submitthem:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosispurposesRwith the consent of the vehicle ownerRon the instruction of prosecutingauthoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes thatinvolve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or itssales and service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by lawPlease check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed in certain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as during air bag deploymentor when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR isdesigned to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR datais recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type ofpersonal identification data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, who have the specialequipment, can read the information if theyhave access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on thefollowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

28 Introduction

Dashboard ........................................... 30Instrument cluster .............................. 31Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33Center console .................................... 34Overhead control panel ...................... 37Door control panel .............................. 38

29

Ataglance

Dashboard

Function Page: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 172

; Combination switch 131

= Instrument cluster 31

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 168

B PARKTRONIC warningdisplay 208

C Overhead control panel 37

D Climate control systems 144

E Ignition lock 159Start/Stop button 159

Function PageF Adjusts the steering wheel

electrically 119Steering wheel heating 120

G Cruise control lever 190

H Parking brake 183

I Diagnostics connection 26

J Opens the hood 336

K Releases the parking brake 183

L Light switch 128

30 DashboardAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays

Function Page: Fuel gauge

; Coolant temperature 238

= Speedometer withsegments 239

Function Page? Multifunction display 240

A Tachometer 238

i Adjust the instrument cluster lightingusing the on-board computer(Y page 250).

Instrument cluster 31

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: ÷ ESP® 289

M SPORT handlingmode in AMG vehicles 290

; · Distance warning 295

= å ESP® OFF 289

? $ Brakes (USA only) 287

A J Brakes (Canada only) 287

B #! Turn signals 131

C ! ABS 288

D 6 SRS 291

E ; Check Engine 292

F h Tire pressure monitor 296

Function PageG ü Seat belt 285

H % Diesel engine:preglow 161÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 290

I ? Coolant 293

J K High-beamheadlamps 132

K L Low-beamheadlamps 130

L T Parking lamps 130

M R This lamp has nofunction

N 8 Reserve fuel 292

32 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 240

; COMAND display; see theseparate operatinginstructions

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 245Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =;

Selects a menu 2399:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 239a

Confirms your selection 239Hides display messages 257

B %

Back 239Switches off the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 33

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page: COMAND; see the separate

operating instructions

; c Seat heating 116

= s Seat ventilation 118

? c PARKTRONIC 208

A ¤ ECO start/stopfunction (AMG vehicles) 163

B £ Hazard warninglamps 132

Function PageC 45 Indicator lamp 48

D ATA indicator lamp 78

E Ü Retracts the rear seathead restraints 112

F u Sedan: rear windowroller sunblind 318

34 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function PageG Stowage compartment 298

Ashtray 318Cigarette lighter 319Cup holder 316

H e Adjusts thesuspension setting 205

I É Sets the vehicle level 204

Function PageJ Stowage compartment 298

K Ú Selects the driveprogram 171

L COMAND controller; seethe separate operatinginstructions

Center console 35

Ataglance

Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)

Function PageG Ashtray 318

Cigarette lighter 319

H Engages parking position P 182

I Selector lever 167

J Cup holder 316

K Stowage compartment 298

L COMAND controller; seethe separate operatinginstructions

Function PageM ß Calls up/saves the

suspension tuning 206

N à Adjusts thesuspension setting 206

O å ESP® 74

P Drive program selector 171

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page: u Switches the rear

interior lighting on/off 136

; | Switches theautomatic interior lightingcontrol on/off 136

= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 135

? 3 Opens/closes thesliding sunroof 1033 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 104

A ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 325

B G SOS button (mbracesystem) 323

Function PageC Rear-view mirror 124

D Buttons for the garage dooropener 331

E Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbracesystem) 325

G p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 135

H c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 136

Overhead control panel 37

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page: r45=

Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors andsteering wheel 125

; Adjusts the seatselectrically 110

= %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 89

? Opens the door 88

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds theexterior mirrors in/outelectrically 122

Function PageB W Opens/closes the

side windows 99

C n Activates/deactivates the overridefeature for the sidewindows in the rearcompartment 66

D p Opens/closes thetrunk lid/tailgate 95

38 Door control panelAt

aglance

Useful information .............................. 40Panic alarm .......................................... 40Occupant safety .................................. 40Children in the vehicle ........................ 60Driving safety systems ....................... 67Theft deterrent locking system ......... 78

39

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.The KEYLESS-GO key must be in thevehicle.

Occupant safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint systems couldresult in them not functioning properly anymore. The restraint systems could then nolonger protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do and could fail in the event ofan accident or activate unexpectedly, forexample. There is an increased risk of injury.Never modify parts of the restraint systems.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.USA only: for further information contact ourCustomer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).

In this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:RSeat beltsRChild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securingsystem

Additional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RNECK-PRO head restraintsRPRE-SAFE®RAir bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp- Front-passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)

Although the systems are independent, theirprotective functions work in conjunction witheach other. Not all air bags are deployed inan accident.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle as well asrestraint systems for infants and children,

40 Occupant safetySafety

see "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 60).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionRS consists of:RThe 6 RS warning lampRAir bagsRThe air bag control unit with crash sensorsREmergency Tensioning Device for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in therearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seatbelts and the outer seat belts in the rear

RS reduces the risk of occupants coming intocontact with the vehicle's interior in the eventof an accident. It can also reduce the effectof the forces to which occupants aresubjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, child restraintsystem components may be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Have SRS checked and repaired immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the 6 SRS indicator lampgoes out while the engine is running.

There is a malfunction if:Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not lightup when the ignition is switched onRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp does not go out after a fewsecondsRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up again

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check your national disposalguidelines. California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to functionon a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced. PRE-SAFE® has electrically operated reversiblebelt tensioners in addition to thepyrotechnic ETDs.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be madeto any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any componentor part of the SRS.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

RDo not install additional trim material, seatcovers, badges, etc. to the:- padded steering wheel boss- knee bag covers- front-passenger air bag cover- outer side of front seat bolsters- side trim next to the rear seat backrest- roof lining trimRDo not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupantsfree of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangersfrom the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot afteran air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection ofothers, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentiallymore seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf youmodify the air bag covers or affix objectssuch as stickers to them, the air bags may notfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify the air bag covers or affixobjects to them.

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bagsintegrated into the seats. Consequently, theair bags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, thefunction of the air bag deactivation systemcould be restricted. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after the airbag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have thedeployed air bags replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.

42 Occupant safetySafety

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and driver's kneebag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags, windowcurtain air bags and pelvis air bags)Rrollover (window curtain air bags)However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powdergenerally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potentialbreathing difficulties, you should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave any breathing difficulty but cannot getout of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window ordoor.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt andmake surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.

As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back aspossible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm). Youshould be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to thesteering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury if the driver front air baginflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far backas possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, shouldnever place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result inserious or fatal injuries should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint or boosterseat recommended for the size and weightof the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty forpeople with asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, youmay wish to get outof the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.You can also open the window to allow freshair to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.The air bag installation locations areidentified by the AIR BAG symbol.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only inthe event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passenger will then be protectedto the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protective

function for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

i After an air bag has been deployed, havethe vehicle towed to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, even if your vehicle isready to drive.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.The front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front passenger's head andchest.They are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rateof vehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRif the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of other air bags in thevehicle

The release time of the front air bags isdependent upon the use of the seat belt.If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicledeceleration. In the first deployment stage,the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.

44 Occupant safetySafety

The front air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is exceeded within afew milliseconds.The deployment of the front-passenger frontair bag is also influenced by the weightcategory of the front passenger, which isdetermined by the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) (Y page 48).The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) forsecond-stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the frontair bags are inflated with the maximumamount of propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weightsensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupiedRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp on the center console is not lit(Y page 48)Rthe air bag control unit predicts a highimpact severity

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under thesteering column. It is deployed together withthe front air bags. The driver's knee bag isdesigned to operate together with the front

air bags in frontal impacts if certainthresholds are exceeded. The driver's kneebag operates best in conjunction withcorrectly positioned and fastened seat belts.The driver's knee bag increases protection ofthe driver against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bagsintegrated into the seats. Consequently, theair bags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, thefunction of the air bag deactivation systemcould be restricted. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work notperformed correctly to the doors or doorpaneling, as well as damaged doors, can leadto the function of the sensors being impaired.The air bags might therefore not functionproperly anymore. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or doorpaneling carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a specialtear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,the side impact air bags cannot deploy

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

correctly and therefore cannot provide theintended protection in the event of anaccident.

Side impact air bags (example: Sedan)

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outerseat cushions.When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsThe side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. Side impactair bags are deployed if the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration or acceleration in alateral direction and determines that sideimpact air bag deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt.Side impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system's

preset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in thefollowing situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Pelvis air bags

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehiclemodel. Using seat covers or other seatcoverings can cause a malfunction of the sideimpact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerfor availability.

Pelvis air bags: enhance the level ofprotection of the vehicle occupants on theside of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs.

46 Occupant safetySafety

The pelvis air bags deploy next to and belowthe outer seat cushions. They are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the pelvis air bags aregenerally not deployed. Side impact air bagsare deployed if the system detects highvehicle deceleration or acceleration in alateral direction and determines that sideimpact air bag deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt.Pelvis air bags: will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sideis not deployed in the following situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidewill deploy if the front-passenger seat belt isfastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags, front-passenger side(example: Sedan)

Window curtain air bags: enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.The window curtain air bags are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deploy inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.Window curtain air bags are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRon the side on which an impact occursRon the driver's side and passenger side, inthe event of a vehicle rollover and if thesystemdetermines that air bag deploymentcan offer the vehicle occupants additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the use of the seat beltRregardless of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags: will not deploy inthe event of impacts which do not exceed thesystem's preset deployment thresholds forvehicle acceleration/deceleration. You willthen be protected by the fastened seat belt.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

Method of operation

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the front passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself orherself in the seat until the 45indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front passenger front air bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thefront passenger seat occupant as weighing asmuch as or less than a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint or if the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started andremain illuminated. This indicates that thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remainilluminated. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted. Depending on occupant weightsensor readings from the seat, it will thenremain illuminated or go out. With the45 indicator lamp illuminated, thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.

With the 45 indicator lamp out, thefront passenger front air bag is activated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate for approximately six secondswhen the engine is started and then go out.This indicates that the front passenger frontair bag is activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front passenger front air bag isdeactivated and will not be deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the front passenger front air bagis activated and will be deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the impact exceeds a predeterminedtriggering thresholdRindependent of the side impact air bag orpelvis air bag

If the front passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced byRthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessedby the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category asidentified by the OCS

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seats whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriate infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors

48 Occupant safetySafety

and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the front-passenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate thefront-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The onlymeans to eliminatethis risk completely is never to place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint on the rearseat.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lampnot illuminate or go outwhilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure that the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated. If the 45indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do

not transport a child on the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size andweight of the child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatmanufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp light up simultaneously, theOCS is malfunctioning. The front passengerfront air bag will be deactivated in this case.Have the system checked by qualifiedtechnicians as soon as possible. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in aposition that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should notposition him/herself in such a way as tocause the passenger's weight to be liftedfrom the seat cushion as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the passenger's weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in thischapter.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

If the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp: does not light up.The Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor.The front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated automatically for certain weightcategories.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the passenger air bag is disabled.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampshows you the current status.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possiblewith their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorThe OCS weight sensor reading is affected ifthe occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. byleaning on the armrest.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have thenecessary repair work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use seat

accessories that have been approved byMercedes-Benz.Both the driver and the front passengershould always observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication ofwhether or not the front passenger ispositioned correctly. Observe also the air bagdisplaymessages that can be displayed in theinstrument cluster (Y page 265).If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by the weight of atypical child up to twelve months old,seated in a child restraint system.Ris occupied by a small individual, such as ayoung teenager or a small adult.Ris occupied by a child in a child restraintsystem whose weight is greater than thatof a typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCSdeactivates the front-passenger front air bag.Deactivation takes place although thecollision fulfills the criteria for deploying thedriver's air bag.For further information, see "Air bag displaymessages" (Y page 265).

System self-test

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect thefunction of the OCS. This could result in thefront-passenger front air bag not functioningas intended during an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

50 Occupant safetySafety

Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Makesure that the bottom and back of the childrestraint system make full contact with thefront-passenger seat cushion and backrest.Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up:Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lockto position 1 or 2Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stopbutton once or twice on vehicles withKEYLESS-GORif an adult is seated properly on the front-passenger seat and the OCS classifies theoccupant as an adultThe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp goes out again after approximately sixseconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCSdetects that the front-passenger seat isempty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp will continue to light up. ThePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampwill not go out.

For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 52).

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passengerseat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlights up and remainson.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of atypical adultRhas been determinedby the system not tobe a child

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, uprightposition.

X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 265).

52 Occupant safetySafety

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or stays on.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child upto twelve months oldin a child restraintsystem

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraintsystem are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. Ifnecessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat beltbeing pulled too tightly.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off, havethe OCS checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seatuntil the OCS has been repaired.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 265).

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraintcovers.

NECK-PROhead restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints increase protection of the

driver's and front-passenger's head andneck. In the event of a rear collision of acertain severity, the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's and the front-passenger seatsare moved forwards and upwards. Thisprovides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered inan accident, reset the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's and front-passenger seats(Y page 54). Otherwise, the additionalprotection will not be available in the event ofanother rear-end collision. NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsthat have been triggered are moved forwardsand can no longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop after a rear-end collision.

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints

NECK-PRO head restraints

NECK-PRO head restraints (example: Sedan)X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown in the direction of arrow; as far asit will go.

X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion backwards inthe direction of arrow= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsX Remove resetting tool: from the vehicledocument wallet.

X Slide resetting tool: into guide;between the NECK-PRO luxury head

restraint and the rear cover of the headrestraint.

X Push resetting tool: downwards until youhear the head restraint deploymentmechanism engage.

X Pull out resetting tool:.X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushionbackwards in the direction of arrow= untilit engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO luxury head restraint.

X Put resetting tool: back into the vehicledocument wallet.

i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardoussituations. Despite your vehicle beingequipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, thepossibility of personal injuries occurring as aresult of an accident cannot be eliminated.Always adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions andmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle infront. Drive carefully.PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rif BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergencybraking situations.Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully — onvehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.

54 Occupant safetySafety

Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, theradar sensor system detects an imminentdanger of collision in certain situations.Rin critical driving situations, e.g. whenphysical limits are exceeded and thevehicle understeers or oversteers severely.

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situationdetected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it isin an unfavorable position.Rthe air pressure in the side bolsters of theseat cushion and seat backrest of the frontactive multicontour seats is increased.Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof andthe side windows are closed so that only asmall gap remains. On vehicles with apanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel, they are closed completely.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. The air pressure inthe side bolsters of the active multicontourseat is reduced again. All settings made byPRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belts are not released:X When the vehicle is stationary, move thebackrest or seat back slightly.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

Information about seat belt adjustment, aconvenience function integrated into PRE-SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat beltadjustment" section (Y page 57).

Seat belts

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the event

of an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neckinjuries, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

G WARNINGSeat belts cannot protect as intended, if:Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or thebelt anchorage has been modified.

Damage caused to seat belts in an accidentmay not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.Modified or damaged seat belts can tear orfail, for example in the event of an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices maybe deployed unintentionally or fail to bedeployed when required. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Never modify seat belts, EmergencyTensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages andinertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are notdamaged or worn and are clean.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 60) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when usedproperly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat beltat all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, pelvis air bags, windowcurtain air bags for the side windows),Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat beltforce limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side(side impact air bags, window curtain airbags, and ETDs) impacts which exceedpreset deployment thresholds and incertain rollovers (window curtain air bagsand ETDs).RNever wear the shoulder belt under yourarm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm. Forthis purpose, you can adjust the height ofthe seat belt outlet.

RPosition the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid orbreakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fittedsnugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than oneperson at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In acrash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use alap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that isas upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to makesure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infantrestraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children be

56 Occupant safetySafety

placed in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Seat belt (example: Sedan)X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 108).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, thedriver's and front-passenger seat beltsautomatically adjust to the upper body(Y page 57).

X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to theappropriate height (Y page 58).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts in the vehicle with the exceptionof the driver's seat belt and the seat belt onthe folding bench seat in the cargocompartment are equipped with a specialseat belt retractor, to which a child restraintsystem can be secured. Further informationcan be found under "Special seat beltretractor" (Y page 63).Information on releasing the seat belt withrelease button?(Y page 58).

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment function adjusts thedriver's and front-passenger seat belt to theupper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Ryou engage the belt tongue in the beltbuckle and you then turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignitionlock and you then engage the belt tonguein the buckle.

The seat-belt adjustment will apply aretraction force if any slack is detectedbetween the occupant and the seat belt. Donot hold on to the seat belt tightly while it isadjusting. You can switch the seat-beltadjustment on and off in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 252).The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Moreinformation about PRE-SAFE® can be foundunder "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupantprotection)" (Y page 54).

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

Belt height adjustment

You can adjust the seat belt height on thefront seats.Wagon: you can also adjust thebelt height on the outer rear seats. Adjust thebelt to a height that allows the upper part ofthe seat belt to be routed across the centerof your shoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease:.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Release belt sash guide release: andmake sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.

Using the rear center seat beltIf the left-hand rear seat backrest is foldeddown and back up again, the rear center seatbelt may lock. The seat belt can then not bepulled out.X To release the rear center seat belt: pullout the seat belt by the belt outlet on thebackrest approximately 1 in (25 mm) andrelease it again.The seat belt is retracted and released.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,

the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

Seat belt (example: Sedan)X Press release button? on belt buckle=.X Guide belt tongue; to belt sashguide:.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out if the driver andthe front passenger have already fastenedtheir seat belts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftera maximum of six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.

58 Occupant safetySafety

If after six seconds, the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed:Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains litas long as the driver's or front-passenger'sseat belt is not fastenedandRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) isexceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lampbegins to flash. A warning tone also soundswith increasing intensity for a maximum of60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remainsilluminated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the seat beltwarning lamp7 flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belts" (Y page 285).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limiters

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longeroperational and are unable to perform their

intended protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices which have beentriggered immediately replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the EmergencyTensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: EmergencyTensioning Devices that are triggered by anelectric motor can be deployed as often asdesired and do not need to be replaced.

The front seat belts and the outer seat beltsin the rear are equipped with EmergencyTensioning Devices and seat belt forcelimiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe restraint systems are operational; see"SRS warning lamp 6" (Y page 41)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the front seat belts

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rearcompartment are triggered independently ofthe lock status of the seat belts.The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-endcollision if the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinal

Occupant safety 59

Safety

Z

direction during the initial stages of theimpact.Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral direction on the side opposite to theimpact.Rin certain situations where the vehicle rollsover if the system determines that it canprovide additional protection.

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty forpeople with asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, youmay wish to get outof the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.You can also open the window to allow freshair to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.If the seat belt is also equipped with a seatbelt force limiter and this is triggered, theforce exerted by the seat belt on the vehicleoccupant is reduced.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which absorb part of the deceleration force.This results in the force exerted on theoccupant being distributed over a greaterarea.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats whenever

possible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical12-month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore strongly

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

recommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing childrestraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 5 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the4 5 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installedincorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannotprotect as intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions and the notes on use. Pleaseensure, that the base of the child restraintsystem is always resting completely on theseat cushion. Never place objects, e.g.cushions, under or behind the child restraint

system. Only use child restraint systems withthe original cover designed for them. Onlyreplace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installedincorrectly or is not secured, it can comeloose in the event of an accident, heavybraking or a sudden change in direction. Thechild restraint system could be thrown about,striking vehicle occupants. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systemsproperly, even if they are not being used.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions.

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securingsystems which have been damaged orsubjected to a load in an accident can nolonger protect as intended. The child cannotthen be restrained in the event of an accident,heavy braking or sudden changes of direction.There is an increased risk of injury, possiblyeven fatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have thesecuring systems on the child restraintsystem checked at a qualified specialistworkshop, before you install a child restraintsystem again.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck. A boosterseat may be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot.

Childrenmay burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight.Protect it with a blanket, for example. If thechild restraint system has been exposed todirect sunlight, let it cool down beforesecuring the child in it. Never leave childrenunattended in the vehicle.

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:RSecure the child with a child or infant seatrestraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.RMake sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children witha child or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and childrenmust always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions.All infant or child restraint systemsmustmeetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be found

62 Children in the vehicleSafety

in the installation instructions that areincluded with the child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinterior or on the infant or child restraint.Do not install a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on the center rear seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat beltretractor is disabled and the inertia real drawsin a portion of the seat belt. The seat beltcannot be immediately refastened. There isan increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.Reactivate the special seat belt retractor andsecure the child restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, excluding thedriver's seat belt and the seat belts of thefolding bench seat in the cargo compartment,are equipped with a special seat beltretractor. When activated, the special seatbelt retractor ensures that the seat belt willnot slacken once the child restraint systemhas been secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seatbelt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button andguide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

Formore information about releasing the seatbelt with the release button, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 58).

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

When installing a child restraint system, besure to observe the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions and the instructionsfor correct use of the child restraint system.

! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint system, make sure that the

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

seat belt for the center seat does not gettrapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could bedamaged.

When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system, fold protective caps; ofLATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings:inwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type(ISOFIX) securing rings:. Complywith thechild restraint system manufacturer'sinstructions when installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardizedsecuring system for specially designed childrestraint systems on the rear seats. TheLATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for twoLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsare installed on the left and right of the rearseats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer'sinstructions.

Top Tether

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of anaccident, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protective

function. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests afterinstalling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lockverification indicator. Adjust the rear seatbackrests so that they are positionedvertically.

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween a child restraint system, securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,and the rear seat. This helps reduce the riskof injury even further.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in themultifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. A warningtone also sounds.

Sedan

The Top Tether anchorages are located in therear compartment behind the head restraints.

64 Children in the vehicleSafety

X Move head restraint: upwards.X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorageA.

X Route Top Tether belt= under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? into Top TetheranchorageA.

X Make sure that Top Tether belt= is nottwisted.

X Fold down cover; of Top TetheranchorageA.

X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 112). Makesure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether belt=.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Complywith the manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so. Make sure thatTop Tether belt= is tight.

Wagon

The Top Tether anchorages are attached tothe rear of the rear seat backrests.X Move head restraint: upwards.X Remove combined cargo cover and net=(Y page 307).

X Route Top Tether beltB under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hookA into Top Tetheranchorage? on the back of rear seatbackrest;.

X Make sure that Top Tether beltB is nottwisted.

X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 112). Makesure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether beltB.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Complywith the manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so. Make sure thatTop Tether beltB is tight.

X Install combined cargo cover and net=(Y page 307).

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.

Children in the vehicle 65

Safety

Z

There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can activate the following child-prooflocks:Rrear doors (Y page 66)Rrear side windows (Y page 66)

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

Child-proof lock, rear door (example: Sedan)

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear sidewindows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

66 Children in the vehicleSafety

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in thedriver's door. If indicator lamp: is off,operation is possible using the switches inthe rear compartment.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 67)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 68)RBASPLUS (BrakeAssistSystemPLUS)withCross-Traffic Assist (Y page 68)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distancewarning function and adaptive BrakeAssist) (Y page 70)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 72)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 75)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 75)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safetysystems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Driving safety systems are merely aidsdesigned to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road, weather and trafficconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Please pay specialattention to the notes on tires,recommended minimum tire tread depths,etc. (Y page 372).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systemsare deactivated. There is an increased dangerof skidding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 288) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 258).

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even if you only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles withthe Driving Assistance package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and acamera system, BAS PLUS can detectobstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by usingtypical characteristics such as the bodycontours and posture of a person standingupright.If the radar sensor system or the camerasystem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUSfunctions are restricted or no longeravailable. The brake system is still availablewith complete brake boosting effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes"section“ (Y page 69).

BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the riskof a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrianand reduce the effects of such a collision. IfBAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, youare assisted when braking.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, therecognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly moving into the radarsensor system detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera iscoveredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.from the sun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizesa pedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is notdistinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camerasystem checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brakepressure will be carried out at the lastpossible moment.When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to thetraffic situation.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

BAS PLUS provides braking assistance inhazardous situations with vehicles in frontwithin a speed range between 4 mph(7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS reacts to:Rstationary objects in the path of yourvehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobjects crossing your path

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) areactivated simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakesfunction as usual, if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer a risk of collisionRno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicleRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou activate kickdown

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists ofthe distance warning function and adaptiveBrake Assist, which are described in thefollowing section.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate ordeactivate the distance warning function inthe on-board computer (Y page 247).

If the distance warning function is notactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.The distance warning function can help youto minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision. If the distance warningfunction detects that there is a risk of acollision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. The distance warning functioncannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.Starting at a speed of around 4 mph(7 km/h), the distance warning functionwarns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

front. An intermittent warning tone will thensound, and the· distance warning lampwill light up in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe todo so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical drivingconditions may also cause the system todisplay a warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detectobstacles that are in the path of your vehiclefor an extended period of time.From a speed of around 40 mph (70 km/h),the distance warning function can also reactto stationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will initially alert you both visuallyand acoustically.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assisti Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in brakingduring hazardous situations at speeds above4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensorsystem to evaluate the traffic situation.With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Should you approach an obstacle andAdaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk ofcollision, Adaptive BrakeAssist calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a rear-endcollision. Should you apply the brakesvigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

automatically increase the braking force to alevel suitable for the traffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer any danger of a rear-endcollisionRno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been recognized as such at least onceover the period of observation. AdaptiveBrake Assist does not react to stationaryobstacles.If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available dueto a malfunction in the radar sensor system,the brake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensor checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheelsindividually if they spin. This enables you topull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,for example if the road surface is slippery onone side. In addition, more drive torque istransferred to the wheel or wheels withtraction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off theignition when the parking brake is beingtested on a brake dynamometer.

72 Driving safety systemsSafety

Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the noteson ESP®(Y page 366) when towing thevehicle with a raised rear axle.ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 289) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 258).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under anycircumstances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as faras necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine startsautomatically when the driver wants to pullaway again. ESP® remains in its previouslyselected status. Example: if ESP® wasdeactivated before the engine was switched

off, ESP® remains deactivated when theengine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)

Important safety notesYou can select between the followingstatuses of ESP:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®X To deactivate:(Y page 247).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate:(Y page 247).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Driving safety systems 73

Safety

Z

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)

Important safety notesYou can select between the followingstatuses of ESP:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding andaccidents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in thesituations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

It may be best to activate SPORT handlingmode in the following situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon designated roads when the vehicle'sown oversteering and understeeringcharacteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The SPORT handling modeSPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷OFFOFF message appears in themultifunction display.

74 Driving safety systemsSafety

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ONONmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Characteristics of activated SPORThandling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.Rengine torque is only restricted to a limiteddegree, and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is restricted to a limiteddegree and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.

RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, itis also not activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section for driving safety systems(Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 288) as well asdisplay messages (Y page 260).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. Inaddition to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 202) and hill start assist(Y page 162).

Driving safety systems 75

Safety

Z

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available forvehicles with the Driving Assistance package.For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system and thecamera system must be switched on and beoperational.With the help of the radar sensor system andthe camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake candetect obstacles that are in front of yourvehicle for an extended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the bodycontours and posture of a person standingupright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes"section“ (Y page 76).

PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead ora pedestrian, and reduce the effects of sucha collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detecteda risk of collision, you will be warned visuallyand acoustically as well as by automaticbraking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake yourvehicle by a partial application of the brakesif a danger of collision is detected. There maybe a collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided,particularly when approaching at too high aspeed. There is a risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficconditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent acollision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all criticalsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, therecognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garages

76 Driving safety systemsSafety

Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera iscoveredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.from the sun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizesa pedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is notdistinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camerasystem checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate ordeactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 247).If the PRE-SAFE®Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph(7 km/h), this function warns you if yourapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound and

the· distance warning lamp will light upin the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have theirseat belts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is betweenapproximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and124 mph (200 km/h)

At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE®Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of yourvehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are activated.

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application.Automatic emergency braking is notperformed until immediately prior to animminent accident.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

Driving safety systems 77

Safety

Z

STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilization.This steering assistance is provided inparticular if:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are ona slippery road surface when you brakeheavily.Rthe vehicle starts to skid.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 67).

If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receivesteering support from STEER CONTROL.Power steering will, however, continue tofunction.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Anyone can start the engine if a validSmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lid/tailgateRthe hoodX To turn the alarm off with theSmartKey: press the% or& buttonon the SmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

78 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on thedashboard. The SmartKey must be insidethe vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies theCustomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends themessage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbraceservice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

Theft deterrent locking system 79

Safety

Z

80

Useful information .............................. 82SmartKey ............................................. 82Doors .................................................... 88Trunk/cargo compartment ................ 90Side windows ...................................... 98Sliding sunroof .................................. 102

81

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could beunintentionally turned in the ignition lock. Thiscould cause the engine to be switched off.There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe SmartKey. Remove any bulky key ringsbefore inserting the SmartKey into theignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To open/close the tailgate= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the%button.

82 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system isarmed again.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lid/tailgateRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 252).When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 251).

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be startedby any of the vehicle occupants if there is aKEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GO with those of aconventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicleby using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lockit using the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and thecorresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).

A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a validSmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, forexample:Rwhen the external door handles aretouchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensorsurface:.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for anextended period.Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 99).

X To unlock the trunk lid/tailgate: pull thehandle on the trunk lid/tailgate.The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid/tailgate.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if youfrequently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons on theSmartKey simultaneously for

SmartKey 83

Openingandclosing

Z

approximately six seconds until the batterycheck lamp flashes twice (Y page 85).i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the%button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice (Y page 85).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid/tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will betriggered (Y page 78).

There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To turn the alarm off with theSmartKey: press the% or& buttonon the SmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To disarm the alarm with KEYLESS-GO:press the Start/Stop button in the ignitionlock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

: Release catch; Mechanical keyX Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 90)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 97)Runlocking the tailgate (Y page 97)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 90)

84 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosivesubstances. If batteries are swallowed, it canresult in severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal injury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 85).i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 84).

: Battery compartment cover; Mechanical keyX Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery compartment cover:opens. Do not hold battery compartmentcover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

= BatteryX Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

SmartKey 85

Openingandclosing

Z

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of batterycompartment cover: into the housingfirst and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into theSmartKey (Y page 84).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

86 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 85) and replace it ifnecessary (Y page 85).

If this does not work:X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 85) and replace it ifnecessary (Y page 85).

If this does not work:X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 360).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 362).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

Ideally, place luggage or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment. Observe the loadingguidelines (Y page 298).

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. If the vehicle hasbeen locked with the SmartKey or withKEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside

88 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 78).You can only open the rear doors from insidethe vehicle if they are not secured by thechild-proof locks (Y page 66).

X To unlock a front door: pull doorhandle;.Locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a front door: pull doorhandle;.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob:.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.You can only open the rear doors from insidethe vehicle if they are not secured by thechild-proof locks (Y page 66).If the vehicle has been locked using thelocking button for the central locking, or hasbeen locked automatically, and a door isopened from the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it hadpreviously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened formthe inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

Doors 89

Openingandclosing

Z

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 251).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 84).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To unlockX Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 78).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the trunk lid/tailgate.

X Press the locking button (Y page 89).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs manually, if necessary (Y page 88).

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 84).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To lockX Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid/tailgate are locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Trunk/cargo compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust

90 Trunk/cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

gases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid/tailgate is open when the engine isrunning, especially if the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid/tailgate. Never drive with thetrunk lid/tailgate open.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

! The trunk lid/tailgate swings upwardsand to the rear when opened. Therefore,make sure that there is sufficient clearanceabove and behind the trunk lid/tailgate.

Ideally, place luggage or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment. Observe the loadingguidelines (Y page 298).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk/cargocompartment. You could otherwise lockyourself out.Sedan without trunk lid remote closingfeature: the trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRopened with the emergency release buttonRunlocked with the mechanical keySedan with trunk lid remote closingfeature: the trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened and closed automatically fromoutsideRopened and closed automatically frominsideRlocked separatelyRopened with the emergency release buttonRunlocked with the mechanical key

Wagon: you can:Ropen and close the tailgate manually fromoutsideRopen the tailgate manually from inside(Wagon with a folding bench seat)Ropen and close the tailgate automaticallyfrom outsideRopen and close the tailgate automaticallyfrom insideRlimit the opening angle of the tailgateRunlock the tailgate using the mechanicalkey

Trunk lid/tailgate reversing featureThe trunk lid/tailgate is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. It reacts if a solidobject obstructs or restricts the trunk lid/tailgate during the closing procedure. Thetrunk lid/tailgate opens again automatically.The automatic reversing feature is only an aidand is not a substitute for your attentivenessto the trunk lid/tailgate while it is closing.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpress the remote operating switch on thedriver’s door, orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid/tailgate, orRpull on the handle on the trunk lid/tailgate

Trunk/cargo compartment 91

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

Handle (example: Sedan)X Press the% button on the SmartKey.X Sedan: pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.Wagon: if you pull handle: and keep it inthis position, you can open the tailgatemanually. If you release the handle, thetailgate opens automatically.

Closing

Recess (example: Sedan)X Pull the trunk lid/tailgate down usingrecess:.

X Wagon: let the tailgate drop and engage inthe lock.

X If necessary, lock the vehicle withthe& button on the SmartKey(Y page 82) or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 83).

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thetrunk/cargo compartment, the trunk lid/tailgate will not lock.Sedan: the trunk lid then opens again.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid/tailgate is open when the engine isrunning, especially if the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid/tailgate. Never drive with thetrunk lid/tailgate open.

! The trunk lid/tailgate swings upwardsand to the rear when opened. Therefore,make sure that there is sufficient clearanceabove and behind the trunk lid/tailgate.

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid/tailgateautomatically with the SmartKey or thehandle in the trunk lid/tailgate.X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the trunk lid/tailgateopens.

orX If the trunk lid/tailgate is unlocked, pull thehandle of the trunk lid/tailgate and releaseit again immediately (Y page 92).

92 Trunk/cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

Closing

Closing button and locking button (example:Sedan): Closing button; Locking button

Sedan: on vehicles with the trunk lid remoteclosing feature, you can close the trunk lidautomatically. On vehicles with the trunk lidremote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO, youcan simultaneously close and lock the trunklid.Wagon: on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, youcan simultaneously close and lock thetailgate.X To close: press closing button: in thetrunk lid/tailgate.

X To close and lock simultaneously:Press closing button; in the trunk lid/tailgate.

i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in thetrunk/cargo compartment, the trunk lid/tailgate will not lock.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot.You could burn yourself by touching theexhaust system if you use HANDS-FREEACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Alwaysensure that you only make the kicking

movement within the detection range ofsensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the reardetection range of KEYLESS-GO, thefollowing situations, for example, couldlead to the unintentional opening of thetrunk lid/tailgate:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least6.5 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.

General notesWith KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREEACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid/tailgate or stop the procedure without usingyour hands. This is useful if you have yourhands full. All you need to do ismake a kickingmovement with your leg under the bumper.Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson. The KEYLESS-GO key must be inthe rear detection range of the vehicle.RWhenmaking the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficientclearance to the rear of the vehicle. Youcould otherwise lose your balance e.g. onice.

(Example: Sedan)

Trunk/cargo compartment 93

Openingandclosing

Z

RAlways ensure that you only make thekicking movement within the detectionrange of sensors:.RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from therear area while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement.Otherwise, the sensors may not functioncorrectly.RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not functionwhen the engine is started.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the reardetection range of KEYLESS-GO, HAND-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. For thisreason, the trunk lid/tailgate could open orclose unintentionally, e.g. if you:- set something down or lift something upbehind the vehicle

- polish the rear of the vehicle.Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key aboutyour person in these situations or insituations similar to these. You can thusavoid unintentionally opening or closing thetrunk lid/tailgate.RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with aprosthetic leg may restrict functionality.

Operation

(Example: Sedan)X To open/close: kick into sensor detectionrange: under the bumper with your foot.You will hear a warning tone while the trunklid/tailgate is opening or closing.

X If the trunk lid/tailgate does not openafter several attempts: wait at least tenseconds, then move your foot under thebumper again.i If you hold your foot under the bumper fortoo long, the trunk lid/ tailgate does notopen or close. Repeat the leg movementfaster if this occurs.

To stop the opening or closing procedure:Rmove your foot in sensor detectionrange: under the bumperRpull the outside of the handle on the trunklid/tailgateRpress the closing button in the trunk lid/tailgate, orRpress theF button on the SmartKey

94 Trunk/cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

If the trunk lid/tailgate closing procedure hasbeen stopped:Rkick with your foot again under the bumperand the trunk lid/tailgate will open.

If the trunk lid/tailgate opening procedurehas been stopped:Rmove your foot again under the bumper andthe trunk lid/tailgate will close.

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trappedduring automatic closing of the trunk lid ortailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, maybe standing in the closing area or may enterthe closing area during the closing process.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:RPress theF button on the SmartKey.RPress the remote operating switch on thedriver’s door.RPress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid/tailgate.RPull the handle on the trunk lid/tailgate.

G WARNINGThe trunk lid/tailgate can be automaticallyopened or closed even if the SmartKey is notin the vehicle. If children are left unsupervisedin the vehicle, they could activate thefunctions. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid/tailgate is open when the engine isrunning, especially if the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid/tailgate. Never drive with thetrunk lid/tailgate open.

! The trunk lid/tailgate swings upwardsand to the rear when opened. Therefore,make sure that there is sufficient clearanceabove and behind the trunk lid/tailgate.

Opening and closing

X To open: pull remote operating switch forthe trunk lid/tailgate: until the trunk lid/tailgate opens.

X To close (Sedan): press remote operatingswitch for trunk lid: until the trunk lid isclosed.

X To close (Wagon): turn the SmartKey toposition 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press remote operating switch fortailgate: until the tailgate is closed.

You can open and close the trunk lid/tailgatefrom the driver's seat when the vehicle isstationary and unlocked.

Trunk/cargo compartment 95

Openingandclosing

Z

Limiting the opening angle of thetailgate (Wagon)

Important safety notes! Make sure there is sufficient clearance toopen the tailgate fully when setting theopening angle. The tailgate could otherwisebe damaged. Ideally, set the opening angleoutside.

ActivatingYou can limit the opening angle of thetailgate. This is possible in the top half of itsopening range, up to approximately 8 in(20 cm) before the stop.X To open the tailgate: pull the handle onthe tailgate.

X To stop the opening procedure at thedesired position: press the closing button(Y page 92) in the tailgate or pull the handleon the outside of the tailgate again.

X To store the position: press and hold theclosing button in the tailgate until you heara short tone.The opening angle limiter is activated. Thetailgate will now stop in the stored positionwhen opening.

DeactivatingX Press and hold the closing button(Y page 92) in the tailgate until you heartwo short tones.

Opening the tailgate from inside thevehicle (Wagon with a folding benchseat)

General notesi Tailgate opening dimensions(Y page 426).

Opening

Inside of tailgateX To unlock the tailgate: slide lockingcatch; to the right.

X To open: pull the top of handle:.X Swing the tailgate upwards.X To lock the tailgate: slide lockingcatch; to the left.

Locking the trunk separately (Sedan)You can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 84).

1 Basic position2 To lock

96 Trunk/cargo compartmentOp

eningandclosing

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise fromposition1 to position2.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Unlocking the trunk (Sedan)! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered (Y page 78).X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 84).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

1 Neutral position.2 To unlockX Turn themechanical key counter-clockwisefrom position1 as far as it will go toposition2.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 90),the trunk is also locked.

Trunk emergency release (Sedan)You can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and openedwith the trunk lid emergency release whenthe vehicle is stationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does notopen the trunk lid if the battery isdisconnected or discharged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.Remergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.

Tailgate emergency release (Wagon)

General notes! The tailgate swings upwards and to therear when opened. Therefore, make surethat there is sufficient clearance above andbehind the tailgate.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid/tailgate (Y page 426).

Trunk/cargo compartment 97

Openingandclosing

Z

If the tailgate can no longer be opened fromoutside the vehicle, use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the tailgate.On vehicles with a folding bench seat, you canuse the handle to open the tailgate frominside the vehicle (Y page 92).

Opening

X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 84).

X Insert mechanical key; into the openingin paneling:.

X Turn mechanical key; 90° clockwise.X Push mechanical key; in the direction ofthe arrow and open the tailgate.

i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 90),the cargo compartment is also locked.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the sidewindow and the door frame as the sidewindow moves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the sidewindow during the opening procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch to open the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock thevehicle. Never leave children unsupervised inthe vehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.

98 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the sidewindowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.i If you press the switch beyond the pointof resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

i When the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 66), the sidewindows cannot be operated from the rear.

Convenience opening

General notesYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functionssimultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel and theroller sunblindsRswitch on the seat ventilation for thedriver's seat

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. Thekey must be in close proximity to thevehicle.

Convenience openingX Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are in the desired position.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notesInformation on the side window reversingfeature (Y page 98).

Side windows 99

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature isoperating, parts of the body could becometrapped in the closing area of the side windowand the sliding sunroof. There is a risk ofinjury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature isoperating. Make sure that no body parts arein close proximity during the closingprocedure.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:With the SmartKey:X Release the& button.X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel open again.

Using KEYLESS-GO:X Release the sensor surface on the doorhandle.

X Pull the door handle immediately and holdit.The side windows and the sliding sunroofor the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel open.

General notesWhen you lock the vehicle, you cansimultaneously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.

Using the SmartKeyX Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point thetip of the SmartKey at the door handle onthe driver's door.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the key mustbe in close proximity to the vehicle.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again untilthe roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe KEYLESS-GO key must be outside thevehicle. All the doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and the

100 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

sliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessedsensor surface:.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle again until the roller sunblindsof the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 99).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the sidewindow is completely closed (Y page 99).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Side windows 101

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and youcannot see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "slidingsunroof" refers to both types of slidingsunroof.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closingprocedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

102 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is freeof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctionsmay occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicleinterior.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i The automatic opening and raisingfeature is available only when the slidingsunroof is closed.

The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can openor close the sun protection cover manuallywhen the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

Sliding sunroof 103

Openingandclosing

Z

i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

Resetting! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed fully after resetting,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 103).

X Keep the3 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can befully opened and closed again(Y page 103).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lower

The panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel can only be operated when the rollersunblind is open.X To open and close: turn the SmartKey toposition 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

Operating the roller sunblinds for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblind,parts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will bestopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelis closed.

Roller sunblind reversing featureThe roller sunblind is equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the roller sunblind during

104 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

the closing process, the roller sunblind opensagain automatically. The automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and is not a substitutefor your attentiveness to the roller sunblindwhile it is closing.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature especially does notreact to soft, light and thin objects such assmall fingers. This means that the reversingfeature cannot prevent someone beingtrapped in these situations. There is a risk ofinjury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: Opening; Opening= ClosingX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press or pull the3 switchbeyond the point of resistance, anautomatic opening/closing process isstarted in the corresponding direction. You

can stop automatic operation by pressingor pulling again.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblinds! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblindscannot be fully opened or closed afterresetting, contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelor the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed (Y page 105).

X Keep the3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel (Y page 104) andthe roller sunblinds (Y page 105) can befully opened again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Sliding sunroof 105

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any directionThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The sliding sunroofcannot be closed andyou cannot see thecause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the3switch in the overhead control panel down to the point ofresistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the3switch in the overhead control panel down to the point ofresistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapmentfeature.

106 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Useful information ............................ 108Correct driver's seat position .......... 108Seats .................................................. 109Steering wheel .................................. 119Mirrors ............................................... 122Memory function .............................. 125

107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 109).

X Make sure that seat= is adjustedproperly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 110)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint isadjusted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 119).

X Make sure that steering wheel: isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 119)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in theinstrument cluster clearly.

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 55).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 56).

108 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirror and the exterior mirrors in such away that you have a good view of road andtraffic conditions (Y page 122).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings with the memory function(Y page 125).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat

adjustment buttons and become trapped.There is a risk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get underthe lever assembly of the seat adjustmentsystem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved thebackrest to an almost vertical position. Whenbraking or in the event of an accident, youcould slide underneath the seat belt andsustain abdomen or neck injuries, forexample. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

Seats 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints in the front seats areinstalled with the NECK-PRO system(Y page 53). For this reason, it is notpossible to remove the head restraintsfrom the front seats.Vehicles without the through-loadingfeature: the head restraints cannot beremoved from the rear compartment seats.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Adjusting the seats

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in anunfavorable position.

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 125).

i Vehicles with the through-loadingfeature: if you fold down a rear seatbackrest, the respective front seat ismoved forwards slightly if necessary. Thisprevents the seats from colliding.

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

110 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

General notesObserve the important safety notes regardingthe seats (Y page 109).Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjustthe height and angle of the head restraints tothe correct position.

Adjusting the angle of the headrestraints

Example: SedanX Push or pull the lower edge of the headrestraint in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the height of the headrestraints electrically

X To adjust the head restraint height: slideswitch for head restraint adjustment: upor down in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster: into the desiredposition.

X To adjust the angle of the headrestraint: push or pull the head restraint inthe direction of arrow;.i Adjust the head restraint so that the backof your head is as close to the headrestraint as possible.

Seats 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rear seat head restraints

Lowering the rear seat head restraintsfrom the front

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Press button:.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

Example: SedanX To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

i If you pull the head restraint forwardslightly, you will require less effort whenmaking adjustments.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintangle

Example: SedanX Pull or push the top of the head restraintuntil it is in the desired position.

Removing and installing the rear seathead restraintsG WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

Example: Sedan

The rear head restraints can only be removedand re-installed on vehicles with the through-loading facility.

112 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Release the rear seat backrest and fold itslightly forwards (Y page 303).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: replace the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

X Fold back the rear seat backrest until itengages.

Adjusting the active multicontourseat

Overviewi Depending on the vehicle's equipment,operation is performed using COMAND orthe control panel on the seat.

: To adjust the seat cushion length; To switch the dynamic function on or off= To adjust the side bolsters of the seat

backrest? To switch the massage function on or offA To adjust the contour of the backrest to

increase/decrease supportB To adjust the height/depth of the

backrest contourThe active multicontour seat on the driver'sside automatically adapts the sides of thebackrest to your current driving style. You can

adjust the contour of the seat individually soas to provide optimum support for your backand sides.

Dynamic functionThe dynamic function adjusts the air cushionsin the side bolsters of the seat backrests toensure ideal lateral support at all times. Youcan choose between two levels.X To switch on: press button; once ortwice until the desired level is set.One or two indicator lamps in button;light up.

X To switch off: press button; repeatedlyuntil all indicator lamps in button; go out.

You can select the following levels:

Level 1 (oneindicator lamp)

Standard setting:slightly increasedlateral support andslow build-up of airpressure in the sidebolsters of the seatbackrest.

Level 2 (twoindicator lamps)

Sport setting:increased lateralsupport and fastbuild-up of pressurein the side bolstersof the seat backrest.

Massage function (PULSE)The massage function helps you to preventmuscle tension on long journeys. You canchoose between two levels.X To switch on: press button? once ortwice until the desired level is set.One or two indicator lamps in button?light up. The air cushions in the lumbarregion vibrate for approximately20 minutes.

Seats 113

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting with COMANDThe multicontour seat function is onlyavailable on the driver's side.You can adjust the active multicontour seatusing COMAND. You can find furtherinformation in the separate COMANDOperating Instructions.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

You can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

Folding bench seat in the cargocompartment (Wagon)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the backrests of the rear bench seat are notlocked in the upright position, the backrestmay fold down while driving. In this case, theseatbelt may not perform its intendedprotective function. There is an increased riskof injury.Make sure that the backrests of the rearbench seat are locked in the upright position.

The folding bench seat in the cargocompartment is only suitable for persons nomore than 4.6 ft (1.40 m) tall and weighing amaximum of 110 lb (50 kg).Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 298).The maximum permissible weight availablefor passengers may be reduced by extensiveoptional extras and the vehicle load. Observethe maximum gross vehicle weight and thegross axle weight rating, which can be foundon the vehicle identification plate(Y page 416).The combined cargo cover and net must beinstalled if you are using the folding benchseat (Y page 308).

Folding out the folding bench seat

X Make sure that the backrests of the rearbench seat are locked in the uprightposition.

X Move the handle for the combined cargocover and net upwards (Y page 308).

X Pull release handle: and fold thebackrest of the folding bench seatupwards.

114 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Hook the seat belts into retainers=.X Pull release handle; and fold the foldingbench seat cushion into the sittingposition.

X Push down the seat cushion until thebackrest engages fully.

X Fold the head restraints upwards.

Installing and removing the seatcushion

Youmust remove the seat cushion if you wishto lift the trunk floor, e.g. if the vehicle has aflat tire.X To remove: fold seat cushion; upwardsand remove it from seat cushionguides:.

X To install: push seat cushion; into seatcushion guides: at a slight angle from therear=.

X Fold seat cushion; back into its originalposition? until it engages.

Folding back the folding bench seat

X Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab:and fold it back into its original positionuntil it engages.

X Press release button: and fold the headrestraints down.

Seats 115

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

! In order to avoid causing damage, pushthe head restraints completely into theirguides and click the seat belt buckles intotheir guides.

X Press release button: and push the headrestraints all the way in.

X Fold backrest; of the folding bench seatinto its original position until it engages.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively hightemperatures may be affected or they mayeven suffer burn-like injuries. There is a riskof injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

Canada only: rear seat

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.Driver's and front-passenger seat: thesystem automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.Rear seat: the system automaticallyswitches down from level 3 to level 2 afterapproximately five minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

116 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Seats 117

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched offprematurely or cannotbe switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electricalconsumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating willswitch back on automatically.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Activating/deactivating

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you haveselected.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 99). The seatventilation of the driver's seatautomatically switches to the highest level.

118 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat ventilation hasswitched offprematurely or cannotbe switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electricalconsumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation willswitch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 121)RStoring settings (Y page 125)

Steering wheel 119

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Steering wheel heating

Activating/deactivating

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in thedirection of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,the steering wheel heating is deactivated.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switchoff the ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

i The steering wheel heatingmay switch offtemporarily if:Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior isabove 86 ‡ (30 †).Rthe temperature of the steering wheel isabove 95 ‡ (35 †).

Indicator lamp= remains on.

120 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The steering wheelheating has switchedoff prematurely orcannot be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electricalconsumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheelheating will switch back on automatically.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ismaking adjustments, make sure that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of thesteering wheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheeladjustment in the opposite direction to thatin which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature, they can become trapped,particularly when unattended. There is a riskof injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 252).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver'sdoor; the SmartKey must be in position 0or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 159)

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.

Steering wheel 121

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Position of the steering wheel fordrivingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles withKEYLESS-GOorRwith the SmartKey: you insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 125).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of theposition of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRYfeature is activated in the on-board computer.(Y page 252)

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge thedistance from road users traveling behind,e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of anaccident.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

122 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, orto the left or right until you have adjustedthe exterior mirror to the correct position.You should have a good overview of trafficconditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.After the engine has been started, theexterior mirrors are automatically heated ifthe rear window defroster is switched on andthe outside temperature is low. Heating takesa maximum of 10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer. (Y page 252)X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 252):

Mirrors 123

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out againautomatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically foldingexterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button: until you hear a click andthen the mirrors engage in position(Y page 123).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 122).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interiorlighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side

exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.X Stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 159).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

124 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Using the memory button

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side

exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthese steps.

Calling up a stored parking positionsetting

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side

exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exteriormirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

Memory function 125

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if theyactivate the memory function, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRactive multicontour seat: seat contour,dynamic function levelRdriver's side: position of the exteriormirrors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 110).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 119) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 122).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storageposition button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat,steering wheel and exterior mirrors are inthe stored position.i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

126 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information ............................ 128Exterior lighting ................................ 128Interior lighting ................................. 135Replacing bulbs ................................. 137Windshield wipers ............................ 138

127

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime.Therefore, your vehicle is equipped withspecial daytime running lamps. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.If youwish to drive during the daytimewithoutlights, switch off the daytime running lampsfunction in the on-board computer(Y page 250).

Driving abroad

Symmetrical low-beam headlampsSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When usingsymmetrical lights, the edge of the road is notlit as widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Asymmetrical low beamHave the headlamps converted back toasymmetrical low-beam headlamps at aqualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 131)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 250)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

128 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKeyin position 0.

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lamp

à is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambientlight (exception: poor visibility due to weatherconditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you haveactivated the daytime running lampsfunction via the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps and parking lamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. Thedaytime running lamps function is required bylaw in Canada. It cannot therefore bedeactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. To dothis, the daytime running lamps functionmustbe switched on using the on-board computer(Y page 250).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settings

Exterior lighting 129

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

take precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lamp

Even if the light sensor does not detect thatit is dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessivelydischarged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lamps

130 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

for several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampX To switch on: turn the light switch to

T.The green T indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lamp

Switching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it isin position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

Exterior lighting 131

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

High-beam headlamps

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction ofarrow:.In theà position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beamheadlamps: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,it controls activation of the high-beamheadlamps (Y page 133).

High-beam flasher

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warninglamps: press button:.

132 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployedRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch offautomatically if the vehicle reaches a speedof above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. It canonly be activated when the low-beamheadlamps are switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turnsignal or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead position.

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Active light function

The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to thesteering movements of the front wheels. Inthis way, relevant areas remain illuminatedwhile driving. This allows you to identifypedestrians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late.In this or similar situations, the automatichigh-beam headlamps will not be deactivatedor activated regardless. There is a risk of anaccident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Exterior lighting 133

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

General notes

You can use this function to set theheadlamps to change between low beam andhigh beam automatically. The systemrecognizes vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortraveling in front of your vehicle, andconsequently switches the headlamps fromhigh beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on thedistance to the other vehicle. Once thesystem no longer detects any other vehicles,it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.

The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/off

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction ofarrow:.The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display lights up when it isdark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and noother road users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds belowapproximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or otherroad users have been detected or the roadsare adequately lit:

134 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.X Switch on the light and drive off.The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: u To switch the rear interior lighting

on/off; | To switch the automatic interior

lighting control on/off

= p To switch the right-hand frontreading lamp on/off

? c To switch the front interior lightingon/off

A p To switch the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p To switch the right-hand reading

lamp on/off; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color and brightness of the ambientlighting can be adjusted using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 250).

Interior lighting 135

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Automatic interior lighting control

Front overhead control panel: u To switch the rear interior lighting

on/off; | To switch the automatic interior

lighting control on/off= p To switch the right-hand reading

lamp on/off? c To switch the front interior lighting

on/offA p To switch the left-hand reading lamp

on/offX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lightingcontrol is activated, the button is flush withthe overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 251).

Manual interior lighting control

Front overhead control panel: u To switch the rear interior lighting

on/off; | To switch the automatic interior

lighting control on/off= p To switch the right-hand reading

lamp on/off? c To switch the front interior lighting

on/offA p To switch the left-hand reading lamp

on/offX To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

136 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Vehicles with static LED headlamps:Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specifiedvoltage.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture duringoperation. Do not allow bulbs to come intocontact with liquids.Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 137).Have the bulbs that you cannot replaceyourself changed at a qualified specialistworkshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.Vehicles with static LED headlamps

The front and rear light clusters of yourvehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Donot replace the bulbs yourself. Contact aqualified specialist workshop which has thenecessary specialist knowledge and tools tocarry out the work required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehiclesafety. You must therefore make sure thatthese function correctly at all times. Have theheadlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Static LED headlamps: High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; Turn signal lamp: PSY 24 W

Changing the front bulbs

High-beam headlamps (static LEDheadlamps)

Replacing bulbs 137

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Using the handle extension, turn bulbholder; counter-clockwise and pull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Turn signal (static LED headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating thewindshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)

138 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensorset to high sensitivity)

4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to thecorresponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automaticallyaccording to the intensity of the rain. Inthe Å position, the rain sensor is moresensitive than in the Ä position, causingthe windshield wipers to wipe morefrequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the trafficconditions. Replace the wiper blades twice ayear, ideally in spring and fall.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Switch2 ô To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluid

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Turn switch: on the combination switchto the corresponding position.When the rearwindowwiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a riskof injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield/rear window.Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe wiper arm without a wiper blade and itfalls onto the windshield/rear window, thewindshield/rear window may be damagedby the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Depending on the equipment level of yourvehicle, there are two variants of wiper blade;these are installed and removed in differentways. Based on the diagrams, check whichsystem is installed in your vehicle.

Windshield wipers 139

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Changing the wiper blades (version 1)

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).

X Fold the wiper arm away from thewindshield until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

X Remove the wiper blade from the retainingpin on the wiper arm in the direction of thearrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Push the new wiper blade onto theretaining pin on the wiper arm in theopposite direction to the arrow.Make sure that the wiper blade slides fullyonto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.

X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiperarm.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

Changing the wiper blades (version 2)

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).

X Fold the wiper arm away from thewindshield until it engages.

X Firmly press release knob: and pull wiperblade; upwards from thewiper arm in thedirection of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade: in the retaineron the wiper arm and slide it into place inthe direction of the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

140 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold wiper arm: away from the rearwindow until it engages.

X Position wiper blade; at a right angle towiper arm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiperblade; in the direction of the arrow untilit releases.

X Remove wiper blade;.

Installing a wiper bladeX Place new wiper blade; onto wiperarm:.

X Hold wiper arm: and press wiperblade; in the opposite direction to thearrow until it engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade; is seatedcorrectly.

X Position wiper blade; parallel to wiperarm:.

X Fold wiper arm: back onto the rearwindow.

Windshield wipers 141

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

142 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information ............................ 144Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 144Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 148Setting the air vents ......................... 155

143

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows couldotherwise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with airdehumidification functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated whenthe engine is running. Optimum operation isonly achieved with the side windows and roofclosed.The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 154).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using theconvenience opening feature (Y page 99).This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired vehicle interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out mostparticles of dust and soot and completelyfilters out pollen. It also reduces gaseouspollutants and odors. A clogged filterreduces the amount of air supplied to thevehicle interior. For this reason, you shouldalways observe the interval for replacingthe filter, which is specified in theMaintenance Booklet. As it depends onenvironmental conditions, e.g. heavy airpollution, the interval may be shorter thanstated in the Maintenance Booklet.

i It is possible that the residual heatfunction may be activated automatically anhour after the SmartKey is removed. Thevehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes todry the automatic climate control.

144 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 154); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 152)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 152)? DisplayA Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 150)B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 149)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 153)D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 148)E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 151)F Sets the air distribution (Y page 151)G Sets the airflow (Y page 152)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 151)

USA only: Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 150); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 152)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 152)? Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 154)A Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 153)B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 149)

Overview of climate control systems 145

Climatecontrol

C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 153)D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 148)E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 151)F Sets the air distribution (Y page 151)G Sets the airflow (Y page 152)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 151)I Display

Information about using dual-zoneautomatic climate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains notes andrecommendations on optimum use of dual-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps abovetheà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt thetemperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp above theá button goesout.RVehicleswith COMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, theclimate status display appears forapproximately three seconds at the bottomof the screen in the COMAND display. Seealso the separate COMAND operatinginstructions. You will see the currentsettings of the various climate controlfunctions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 164).

146 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada onlyFront control panel

: To set climate control to automatic (Y page 150); To defrost the windshield (Y page 152)= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 152)? DisplayA To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 154)B To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 154)C To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 149)D To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 153)E To switch climate control on/off (Y page 148)F To set the temperature, right (Y page 151)G To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 150)H To set the airflow (Y page 152)I To set the air distribution (Y page 151)J To set the temperature, left (Y page 151)

Rear control panelK To increase the temperature (Y page 151)L DisplayM To increase the airflow (Y page 152)

Overview of climate control systems 147

Climatecontrol

N To reduce the airflow (Y page 152)O To reduce the temperature (Y page 151)

Information about using 3-zoneautomatic climate control

Automatic climate controlThe 3-zone automatic climate control is onlyavailable on vehicles for Canada.The following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps abovetheà and¿ buttons light up.RIn automatic mode, you can also use theñ button to set a climate mode(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). TheMEDIUM level is recommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt thetemperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side and the rearcompartment as well. The indicator lampabove theá button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you wantto heat or ventilate the vehicle interiorwhen the ignition is switched off. Theresidual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switchedoff.RVehicleswithCOMAND: if you change thesettings of the climate control system, theclimate status display appears forapproximately three seconds at the bottomof the screen in the COMAND display. See

also the separate COMAND operatinginstructions. You will see the currentsettings of the various climate controlfunctions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the fullclimate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 164).

Operating the climate controlsystems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

i Activate climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 150).

148 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To switch on: press theà button onthe control panel for the climate control.The indicator lamp above theà buttonlights up. Airflow and air distribution are setto automatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp above the^ buttongoes out. The previously selected settingsare restored.

X To switch off: press the^ button.The indicator lamp above the^ buttonlights up.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is only available when the engine isrunning. The air inside the vehicle is cooledand dehumidified according to thetemperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is amalfunction.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp above the¿ buttonlights up.i When the "Cooling with airdehumidification" function is activated,one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliaryheating button will light up on vehicles withauxiliary heating.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp above the¿ buttongoes out. The "Cooling with airdehumidification" function has a delayedswitch-off feature.

Operating the climate control systems 149

Climatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The"Cooling with airdehumidification"function cannot beswitched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates thetemperature of the dispensed air, the airflowand the air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.

Activating/switchingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp above theà buttonlights up. Automatic air distribution andairflow are activated.i 3-zone automatic climate control: whenautomatic mode is activated, you canselect a climate mode (Y page 150).

X To switch to manual mode:

Dual-zone automatic climate control: pressair distribution adjustment buttonF(Y page 145).3-zone automatic climate control: press airdistribution adjustment buttonI(Y page 147).The indicator lamp above theà buttongoes out.

orX Dual-zone automatic climate control: pressairflow adjustment buttonG(Y page 145).3-zone automatic climate control: pressairflow adjustment buttonH(Y page 147).The indicator lamp above theà buttongoes out.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsThe "Set climate mode" function is onlyavailable with 3-zone automatic climatecontrol.You can select the following climate modesettings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less draft

150 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Press theà button.X Press climate mode selection buttonG upor down and select the desired level(Y page 147)

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To increase/reduce: press temperatureselection switchE orH up or down(Y page 145).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

Automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe front compartment: presstemperature selection switchF orJ upor down (Y page 147).

Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the frontcontrol panel: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttongoes out.

X Press temperature selection switchF orJ up or down (Y page 147).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the rearcontrol panel: press ther orsbutton on the rear control panel.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs the airflow through the center,

side and footwell air vents (USA only)¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the

defroster, center and side air vents(Canada only)

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed when the controls on the side airvents are turned downwards.

Operating the climate control systems 151

Climatecontrol

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Dual-zone automatic climate control: pressair distribution adjustment buttonF up ordown, until the desired symbol appears inthe display (Y page 145).

X 3-zone automatic climate control: press airdistribution adjustment buttonI up ordown, until the desired symbol appears inthe display (Y page 147).

Setting the airflow

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To increase/reduce: press airflow switchG up or down (Y page 145).

3-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To increase/reduce front-compartment airflow: press airflowswitchH up or down (Y page 147).

X To increase/reduce the rear airflow:press theK orI switch.

If the battery is not sufficiently charged,blower output may be reduced. As soon asthe battery is sufficiently charged, full bloweroutput will be available.

Switching the ZONE function on/offX To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttonlights up.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger side.

3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttongoes out.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting"function as soon as the windshield is clearagain.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp above the¬ buttonlights up.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

If the battery is not sufficiently charged,blower output may be reduced. Once thebattery is sufficiently charged again, fullblower output will be available again.X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp above the¬ buttongoes out. The previously selected settings

152 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

are restored. Air-recirculation moderemains deactivated.

orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp above the¬ buttongoes out. Airflow and air distribution are setto automatic mode.

orX Dual-zone automatic climate control: presstemperature selection switchE orH upor down (Y page 145).3-zone automatic climate control: presstemperature selection switchF orJ upor down (Y page 147).

orX Dual-zone automatic climate control: pressairflow switchG up or down(Y page 145).3-zone automatic climate control: pressairflow switchH up or down(Y page 147).

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To activate: press off-road buttonÙagain.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ cooling with airdehumidification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X Adjust the side air vents so that thewarmedair is directed to the side windows.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Dual-zone automatic climate control: pressair distribution adjustment buttonF up ordown (Y page 145), until theP orO symbol appears in the display.

X 3-zone automatic climate control: press airdistribution adjustment buttonI up ordown (Y page 147), until theP orO symbol appears in the display.

X Adjust the side air vents so that no air isdirected to the side windows.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches offautomatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp above the¤ buttonlights up or goes out.

Operating the climate control systems 153

Climatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster hasdeactivatedprematurely or cannotbe activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside thevehicle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, inparticular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent thewindows from fogging up.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp above theg buttonlights up.i Dual-zone automatic climate control: air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated at high outside temperatures.3-zone automatic climate control: air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated at high levels of pollution or athigh outside temperatures.When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp above the

g button does not light up. Outside airis added after about 30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp above theg buttongoes out.i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes atoutside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes ifcooling with air dehumidification isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes atoutside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡ (5†) if the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function isactivated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesThe residual heat function is only available invehicles for Canada with automatic climatecontrol.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the vehiclefor approximately 30minutes after the enginehas been switched off. The heating timedepends on the temperature that has beenset.

154 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock or remove it (Y page 159).

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp above theÌ buttonlights up.i If the residual heat function is activated,the windows may fog up on the inside.

i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp above theÌ buttongoes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the airoutlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheels=and? up or down.

Setting the side air vents

: Defroster vent; Side air vent= Control for side air vent

Setting the air vents 155

Climatecontrol

Z

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel= up ordown.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating thevehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with airdehumidification" function. Otherwise,temperature-sensitive items stored in theglove box could be damaged.

: Air vent thumbwheel; Air vent

When automatic climate control is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.X To open/close: turn thumbwheel:clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

Setting the center vents in the rearcompartment

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear control panel, only for Canada with

3-zone automatic climate control? Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheel: up ordown.

Setting the B-pillar air vent

: B-pillar air vent; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air ventX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel; to theleft or right.

156 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Useful information ............................ 158Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 158Driving ............................................... 158Automatic transmission ................... 167Refueling ............................................ 175Parking ............................................... 182Driving tips ........................................ 184Driving systems ................................ 189

157

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles(1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varyingvehicle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at fullthrottle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before thetachometer needle isÔ of the way to thered area of the tachometer.RIf possible, do not depress the acceleratorpedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).

After 1000miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and acceleratethe vehicle to full speed.

Additional breaking-in notes for AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

AMG vehicles with self-locking rearaxle differentialYour vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingdifferential on the rear axle. To protect thedifferential on the rear axle, carry out an oilchange after a breaking-in phase of2,000 miles (3,000 km). This oil changeprolongs the service life of the differential.Have the oil change carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

158 DrivingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), themaximum engine speed is restricted inorder to protect the engine. To protect theengine and maintain smooth engine

operation, avoid driving at full throttle whenthe engine is cold.

HYBRID vehicles: ensure that you read the"HYBRID" supplement included in the vehicleliterature. Otherwise, you may not recognizedangers.

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesRDo not store the KEYLESS-GO key togetherwith:- electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey

- metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal filmRDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in metalobjects, e.g. metal cases.

Driving 159

Drivingandparking

Z

This can affect the functionality ofKEYLESS-GO.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped withSmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stopbutton.The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentSmartKey positions in the ignition lock. Thisis only the case if you are not depressing thebrake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine startsimmediately.The Start/Stop button can be removed fromthe ignition lock. Then, you can insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. You should, however,always take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. As long as theSmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using theStart/Stop button andRelectrically powered equipment can beoperated.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out after

starting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 287).X Insert Start/Stop button: into ignitionlock;.i When you insert Start/Stop button:into ignition lock;, the system needsapproximately two seconds recognitiontime. You can then use Start/Stopbutton:.

Activating power supplyX Position 0: if Start/Stop button: has notyet been pressed, this corresponds to theSmartKey being removed from the ignition.

X Position 1: press Start/Stop button:.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.

Switching on the ignitionX Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.i The ignition is switched off when:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: oncewhen in this position.

Start/Stop button= USA only? Canada only

160 DrivingDrivingandparking

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out ofparking position P.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

General notesi Vehicles with a gasoline engine: thecatalytic converter is preheated for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.

i You can also start the engine when thetransmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyi To start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.

X To start a gasoline engine: turn theSmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock(Y page 159) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

X To start a diesel engine: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 159).The% preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X When the% preglow indicator lampgoes out, turn the SmartKey to position3(Y page 159) and release it as soon as theengine is running.

i You can start the engine without preglowif the engine is warm.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the enginei The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle manually without insertingthe SmartKey into the ignition lock. TheStart/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be inthe vehicle. This mode for starting theengine operates independently of the ECOstart/stop automatic engine start function.

Driving 161

Drivingandparking

Z

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X To start a gasoline engine: press theStart/Stop button once (Y page 159).The engine starts.

X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 159).Preglow is activated and the engine starts.i If the engine is warm, the preglow time isshortened.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the parking brake (Y page 183).X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then isthe parking lock released. If you do notdepress the brake pedal, you can move theDIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lockremains engaged.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 251).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or ona downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

162 DrivingDrivingandparking

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle isstopped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop display

i Hybrid vehicles: observe the notes onthe ECO start/stop function in the"HYBRID" supplement.

If the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine offautomatically if the vehicle stops moving.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.If the ECO start/stop function has beenmanually deactivated (Y page 164) or amalfunction has caused the system to be

deactivated, the¤ symbol is notdisplayed.AMG vehicles: the Stop/Start activeStop/Start active orStop/Start inactiveStop/Start inactivemessage in the AMGmenu in the multifunction display goes out.AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop functionis only available in drive program C.For further information on automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 163) and automaticengine start (Y page 164).

Automatic engine switch-off

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is operationaland the¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within thecomfort range.Rthe engine is at normal operatingtemperature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If conditions for automatic engine switch-offhave not been fulfilled, the¤ symbol willbe shown in yellow.AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in themultifunction display additionally shows theStop/Start inactiveStop/Start inactive message.i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stoppedautomatically.

i All vehicles (apart from AMGvehicles): automatic engine switch-off cantake place a maximum of four times

Driving 163

Drivingandparking

Z

consecutively (initial stop then repeatedthree times). The¤ symbol is shown inyellow in the multifunction display after theengine has been started automatically forthe fourth time. When the¤ symbol isshown in green in themultifunction display,automatic engine switch-off is againpossible.

i AMG vehicles: times which the enginecan be automatically switched off.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched offautomatically. It is then not necessary tocontinue applying the brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When you depressthe accelerator pedal, the engine startsautomatically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine start

General notesThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M(AMG vehicles).Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interiordeviates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on thewindshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe condition of charge of the battery is toolow.Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or thedriver's door is opened.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if you:Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is notactivated and the transmission is inposition D or N.Rdepress the accelerator pedal.Rmove the transmission out of position P.i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO buttonX To switch off (except AMG vehicles):press button:.Indicator lamp; and the¤ symbol inthe multifunction display go out.

X To switch on (except AMG vehicles):press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If all conditionsfor automatic engine switch-off(Y page 163) are fulfilled, the¤ symbolis shown in green in the multifunctiondisplay.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 163) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

164 DrivingDrivingandparking

X To switch off (AMG vehicles): pressbutton: in drive program C.

orX Switch to drive program S, S+ or M(Y page 171).Indicator lamp; and the¤ symbol inthe multifunction display go out.The Stop/Start activeStop/Start active or Stop/StartStop/Startinactiveinactivemessage in the AMGmenu in themultifunction display goes out.

X To switch on (AMG vehicles): pressbutton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If driveprogram S, S+ orM is active, the automatictransmission switches to drive program C.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 163) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display. In addition, theStop/Start activeStop/Start active message is shown inthe AMGmenu in themultifunction display.If conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 163) have not been fulfilled, the¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If thisis the case, the ECO start/stop function isnot available. In addition, the Stop/StartStop/Startinactiveinactive display message is shown in theAMG menu in the multifunction display.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivatedmanually or as the result of a malfunction.The engine will then not be switched offautomatically when the vehicle stops.

Driving 165

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKeyin the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 161). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 362).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with agasoline engine:The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

The coolanttemperature gaugeshows a value above248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolantto cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 339). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

166 DrivingDrivingandparking

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

HYBRID vehicles: ensure that you read the"HYBRID" supplement included in the vehicleliterature. Otherwise, you may not recognizedangers.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P buttonj Park position with parking lockk Reverse gear

i Neutralh Drive

Transmission position and driveprogram display! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. For this purpose, we recommendselecting transmission position D andautomatic drive program E (drive programC in AMG vehicles) or S.

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.

Automatic transmission 167

Drivingandparking

Z

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.

i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnsto its original position. The currenttransmission position P, R, N or D appearsin the transmission position display(Y page 168) in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and driveprogram display! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should selecttransmission position D and drive programE or S.

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

The current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.

i The arrows in the transmission positiondisplay show how and into whichtransmission positions you can changeusing the DIRECT SELECT lever.

Engaging park position P! If the engine speed is too high or thevehicle is moving, do not shift theautomatic transmission directly from D toR, from R to D or directly to P. Theautomatic transmission could otherwise bedamaged.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in thedirection of arrow P.

i The automatic transmission shifts intopark position P automatically:Rif you open the driver's door while thevehicle is stationary in transmissionposition D or RRif you open the door while traveling atvery low speeds in transmission positionD or R

168 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS: if thevehicle is braked using the HOLD function orDISTRONIC PLUS, the automatictransmission shifts automatically totransmission position P. In addition, at leastone of the following conditions must befulfilled:Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's door is open and the seat beltis not in the buckle.

Engaging park position P in AMGvehicles

X When the vehicle is stationary, press Pbutton:.

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission toR when the vehicle is stationary.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

If the engine has been switched off, theautomatic transmission automatically shiftsto N.If the automatic transmission is to remain inneutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in carwashes with a towing device, please observethe following instructions:Using the SmartKey:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the parking brake is engaged, release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave theSmartKey in the ignition lock.

Using KEYLESS-GO:RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.REngage park position P.RRelease the brake pedal.RRemove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.RSwitch on the ignition.

Automatic transmission 169

Drivingandparking

Z

RDepress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.RShift to neutral N.RRelease the brake pedal.RIf the parking brake is engaged, release it.RSwitch off the ignition and leave theSmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P(Y page 182) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theparking brake in addition to theparking lock in order to secure thevehicle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunctioning, the transmissionmay be locked in position P. Havethe vehicle electronics checkedimmediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission could bedamaged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission topositionN if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 171)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

AMG vehiclesWhen shifting down, the double-clutchfunction is active regardless of the currentlyselected drive program. The double-clutchfunction reduces load change reactions andis conducive to a sporty driving style. Thesound generated by the double-clutchfunction depends on the drive programselected.

170 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positions D andR can help to free a vehicle that has becomestuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's enginemanagement restricts switching betweentransmission positions D and R to speeds upto a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shiftback and forth between transmissionpositions D and R, move the selector lever upand down beyond the pressure point.

Program selector button

General notes

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)X Press program selector button:repeatedly until the letter for the desiredgearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

The program selector button allows you tochoose between different drivingcharacteristics.

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 172).

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program E each time theengine is started.

AMG vehicles

Drive program selector with manual drive programX Turn drive program selector: until thedesired drive program appears in themultifunction display in the speedometer.The drive program indicator on driveprogram selector: lights up in red.

i Further information about permanentdrive program M(Y page 173).As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary driveprogram M(Y page 172).

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty drivingstyle

Automatic transmission 171

Drivingandparking

Z

M Manual Manual gear shifting

RS RACESTART

Optimal vehicleacceleration from astandstill

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 172).

Only change from automatic drive programC,S or S+ to manual drive programM when thevehicle is stationary.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program C each time theengine is started.

i RS cannot be selected during normaldriving. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 203).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the manual drive program, you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters: and;.Further information about permanent driveprogram M(Y page 173).Further information about temporary driveprogram M(Y page 172).

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive programs E and SDrive program E (drive program C on MAGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S (or, in the case of AMGvehicles, drive programs S and S+) ischaracterized by the following:Rsporty engine and automatic transmissionsettingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheelpaddle shifters. The transmission must be inposition D.You can activate manual drive program M inthe E and S automatic drive programs.

i As well as temporary drive program M,you can also activate permanent driveprogram M(Y page 171).Further information about permanent driveprogram M(Y page 173).

172 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 172).Manual drive program M is temporarilyactivated. The selected gear andM appearin the multifunction display.

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for alimited amount of time. Depending on whichpaddle shifter is pulled, the automatictransmission immediately shifts into the nextgear down or up, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 172).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.i If the maximum engine speed on thecurrently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-handsteering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 172).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. Therecommended gear is shown in themultifunction display.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activated manual drive programM, it will remain active for a certain amountof time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. inthe case of lateral acceleration, during anoverrun phase or when driving on steepterrain.If manual drive program M has beendeactivated, the automatic transmissionshifts into the automatic drive program thatwas last selected, i.e. E or S.You can also deactivate manual driveprogram M yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheelpaddle shifter and hold it in place(Y page 172).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.

orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 171).Manual drive program M is deactivated.The automatic transmission switches intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected, i.e. E or S.

Manual drive program (AMG vehicles)

General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmission mustbe in position D.

Automatic transmission 173

Drivingandparking

Z

i As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary driveprogram M(Y page 172).

Switching on the manual drive programX Turn the drive program selector(Y page 171) until M appears in themultifunction display.The indicator M on the drive programselector lights up in red.

Themanual drive program is only available forAMG vehicles.Manual drive program M is different fromdrive programs S and S+ with regard tospontaneity, responsiveness andsmoothness of gear changes.Manual drive program M can be selectedusing the drive program selector. In manualdrive program M, you can change gear usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters if thetransmission is in position D. The gearcurrently selected and engaged is shown inthe multifunction display.

Upshifting! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicator

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in themultifunction display.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stop withoutshifting down, the automatic transmissionwill shift down to a gear that will allow thevehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

Kickdowni Kickdown is not possible in manual driveprogram M.

Switching off themanual drive programX Turn the drive program selector(Y page 171) until C, S or S+ appears in themultifunction display.

174 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Transfer case! Performance tests may only be carriedout on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brakesystem or transfer case could otherwise bedamaged. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop for a performance test.

! To prevent ESP® from intervening, theignition must be switched off (SmartKey orthe Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if:Rthe parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is being towed with only oneaxle raised (not permitted for vehicleswith 4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise bedamaged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is alwaystransmitted to both axles.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

Refueling 175

Drivingandparking

Z

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

G WARNINGVehicles with a diesel engine:If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuelvehicles with a gasoline engine. Do notswitch on the ignition if you accidentallyrefuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, thefuel will enter the fuel system. Even smallamounts of the wrong fuel could result indamage to the fuel system and the engine.The repair costs are high. Notify a qualifiedspecialist workshop and have the fuel tankand fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognizedby the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 418).

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flapPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 175).

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be used

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close the

176 RefuelingDrivingandparking

vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

To open the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be usedX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.This corresponds to key position 0: "keyremoved".The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap fully.X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Sedan: insert the fuel filler cap into thebracket on the inside of fuel filler flap;.

orX Wagon: insert the fuel filler cap into therecesses in the fuel filler flap hinge armhorizontally from above.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Press the fuel filler flap closed until itengages audibly.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of thecentral locking prevents the fuel filler flapfrom closing.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. A message appears in themultifunction display (Y page 272).In addition, the;Check Enginewarninglamp may light up (Y page 292).For further information on warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,see (Y page 292).

Fuel filler flap emergency release

X Sedan: open the trunk lid.X Slide down the parcel net.X Open the right-hand side trim panel.

Refueling 177

Drivingandparking

Z

X Remove the first-aid kit (Y page 352).X Detach the emergency release fromretainer:.

X Pull the emergency release in the directionof arrow;.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

X Wagon: open the tailgate.X Open the right-hand side trim panel.X Fold down the trim.X Pull emergency release: in the directionof the arrow.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

178 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and removeit immediately (Y page 159).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.

The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been runcompletely dry.X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds(Y page 159).

X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runssmoothly.

If the engine does not start:X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds(Y page 159).

X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds untilit runs smoothly.

If the engine does not start after three attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).X Open the trunk lid or the tailgate.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 177).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Refueling 179

Drivingandparking

Z

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)

Important notes on useTo function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment must be operated with thereducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of thetasks performed during maintenance. Undernormal operating conditions, a tank of DEFlasts until the next service due date.When the supply of DEF is almost used up,the Check Additive See Operator'sCheck Additive See Operator'sManualManual message is shown in themultifunction display.When theDEF supply drops to aminimum, theRemaining Starts: 16Remaining Starts: 16 message is shownin the multifunction display.If the Remaining Starts: 16Remaining Starts: 16 messageappears in the multifunction display, you canstart the engine another 16 times. If DEF isnot refilled, you will subsequently be unableto start the engine. Refill the DEF tank withapproximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF. Have the DEFtank refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop.Use the special DEF refill bottle when addingDEF between maintenance intervals. Contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center withany questions or, if necessary, contactRoadside Assistance (Y page 24).If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡(Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF isfrozen and there is an active warningindicator, it may not be possible to add DEF.Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in agarage, until DEF has become fluid again. Itwill then be possible to add DEF again.Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at aqualified specialist workshop.Further information about BlueTEC exhaustgas aftertreatment andDEF is available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Important safety notes on the refillingprocedureDEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You mayexperience a burning sensation in your eyes,nose and throat. Coughing and watering ofthe eyes are possible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEFtank only in well-ventilated areas.DEF must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing and must not beswallowed. Keep DEF away from children.If you or other persons come into contact withDEF, observe the following:RRinse DEF from your skin immediately withsoap and water.RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse yourmouth out immediately. Drink plenty ofwater. Seek medical assistance withoutdelay.RChange out of clothing contaminated withDEF immediately.

! Only use DEF in accordance withISO 22241. Do not mix any additives withDEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. Thismay destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.

! Rinse surfaces that have come intocontact with DEF immediately withwater orremove DEF using a damp cloth and coldwater. If the DEF has already crystallized,use a sponge and coldwater to clean it. DEF

180 RefuelingDrivingandparking

residues crystallize after time andcontaminate the affected surfaces.

! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not beadded to the fuel tank. If DEF is added tothe fuel tank, this can lead to enginedamage.

! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-tight. It could otherwise be damaged.

The DEF filler neck is under the trunk floor.X Switch the ignition off.X Open the trunk.X Lift up the trunk floor (Y page 312).

X Turn DEF cap: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Turn DEF filler cap; counter-clockwiseand open it.Filler cap; is secured with a plastic strip.

X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refillbottle=.

X Position DEF refill bottle= as shown onthe filler neck and screw it on hand-tight.

X Press DEF refill bottle= downwards.The DEF tank is filled. This may take up toone minute.i To top up between service intervals, fillthe DEF tank with approximately 1 gal(3.8 l) DEF. 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF is equivalent toapproximately 2 DEF refill bottles. Thenhave the DEF supply checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop and completely refilledif necessary.

X Release DEF refill bottle=.When DEF refill bottle= is no longerpressed down, filling stops. DEF refill bottle= can be removed when it has been onlypartially emptied.

X Turn DEF refill bottle= counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Mount DEF filler cap; on the filler neckand turn it clockwise.

Refueling 181

Drivingandparking

Z

X Replace DEF cover: as shown and turn itclockwise as far as it will go.

X Fold the trunk floor down.X Close the trunk lid.X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).The Check Additive See Operator'sCheck Additive See Operator'sManualManual message goes out afterapproximately one minute.i If the Check Additive SeeCheck Additive SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual message continuesto be shown in the multifunction display,add an additional bottle of DEF.

For further information on DEF, see(Y page 421).

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the frontwheels must be turned towards the curb.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

182 ParkingDrivingandparking

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.Using the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.i If you turn off the engine with theSmartKey and then remove it from theignition lock or open a front door, theautomatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically.

Using KEYLESS-GOX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 159).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.i If you turn off the engine with the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmissionshifts to N. If you then open the driver's orfront-passenger door, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.

i In the event of an emergency, the enginecan be turned off while the vehicle is inmotion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake thevehicle when the service brake is faulty. Donot apply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

If you brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the brake lamps will not light up.X To apply: depress parking brake; firmly.When the engine is running, the$ (USAonly) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.

X Pull release handle:.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamp goes outin the instrument cluster.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.

Parking 183

Drivingandparking

Z

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communicationequipment while driving, you will bedistracted from traffic conditions. You couldalso lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are driving. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile phone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers

a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are notneeded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-start trafficand in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident is greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

184 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, only have work on the engine carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

Example: ECO display

The ECOdisplay gives you information on howeconomical your driving style is. The ECOdisplay assists you in achieving the optimumdriving style in terms of consumption, takingthe actual and selected conditions intoconsideration. Your driving style cansignificantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationAccelerationRConstantConstantRCoastingCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higherpercentage indicates a more economicaldriving style.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption and a fixed percentage

count in the ECO display does not indicate afixed consumption figure.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not taken intoconsideration by the ECO display.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of allacceleration processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstantConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccelerationAcceleration and ConstantConstant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for ConstantConstantwill change.

Driving tips 185

Drivingandparking

Z

i The ECO display summaries the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the barschange dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. Formore dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

Further information on the ECO display(Y page 242).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Do not depress the brake pedal continuouslywhile the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing thebrakes to rub by constantly applying lightpressure to the pedal. This results inexcessive and premature wear to the brakepads.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakeswhen braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after thevehicle has been washed or driven throughdeep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.

186 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. If you areplanning to have the vehicle tested on sucha dynamometer, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to obtain furtherinformation first. Otherwise, you coulddamage the drive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®system operates automatically, the engineand the ignition must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or1) while the parking brake is being testedon a brake dynamometer.Brakingmaneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®system operates automatically, the engineand the ignition system must be switchedoff (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock or Start/Stop button inposition 0 or 1) when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brakedynamometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towedwithone of the axles raised.

Brakingmaneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. Consult aqualified specialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals. To do so, press firmly on the brakepedal when driving at a high speed. Thisimproves the grip of the brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) at (Y page 68) or of BAS PLUS withIntersection Assist at (Y page 68).The braking characteristics of the vehicle canbe seriously impaired if:Rbrake pads other than those recommendedare installedRthe recommended brake fluid is not usedSafe braking can no longer be guaranteed.

AMG high-performance and ceramicbrakesThe AMG brake systems are designed forheavy loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such astemperature and humidity

Driving tips 187

Drivingandparking

Z

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individualdriving style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under allcircumstances. An aggressive driving stylewill lead to high wear. You can obtain furtherinformation about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, andadapt your driving and braking accordinglyduring this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results incorrespondingly high brake wear. Observethe# brake wear warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and note any brake statusmessages in the multifunction display.Especially for high performance driving, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

Winter driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.

i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do notcover the radiator, e.g. with a protectivecover. The measuring function of theonboard diagnosis system may otherwiseprovide inaccurate values. Some of these

188 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

values are required by law and musttherefore always be accurate.

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 374).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 374).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 375).

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. Always adapt your driving styleand drive at a speed to suit the prevailingweather conditions.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, youmust shift to a lower gearin time. By doing so, you will make use of thebraking effect of the engine. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.Cruise control cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Cruisecontrol is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and forstaying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brake must be released.Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

You can accept the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumedwhen the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicledecelerates. If you do not know the storedspeed, the vehicle could decelerateunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards:.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the CruiseCruiseControl OffControl Off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front.Vehicles are detectedwith the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically so that the set speed is notexceeded.

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This isespecially important if the vehicle is laden. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannotprevent a collision without your intervention.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the devicewill voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and

2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGHybrid vehicles: be sure to read the "HYBRID"supplement. Otherwise, you could fail torecognize dangers.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.stopped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearlyidentify other road users and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rain

Rinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inparking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects avehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS mayunexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to thestored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you passvehicles driving on the left (left-hand drivecountries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you passvehicles driving on the right (right-handdrive countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, thefollowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not beactivated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down= until the desired speedis set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS PassiveDISTRONIC PLUS Passive

message appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speedyou determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be setis 18 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away withDISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot fromthe brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, yourvehicle accelerates to the set speed.

i The vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is drivingon a different line from another vehicle. Thevehicle then brakes automatically. There isa risk of an accident. Be ready to brake atall times.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front has slowed down, it brakes yourvehicle. In this way, the distance you haveselected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated upto the speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty drivingstyle when you have selected the S drivingprogram (Y page 171). Acceleration behindthe vehicle in front or to the set speed is thennoticeably more dynamic. If you haveselected the E driving program, the vehicleaccelerates more gently. This setting isrecommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph(70 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining thedistance to a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicleis accelerated. Acceleration will beinterrupted if changing lanes takes too longor if the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by avehicle occupant or from outside thevehicle.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 198).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to a standstillat a sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically toposition P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it isautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 197).

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientdistance to the vehicle in front and complywith the minimum distance as required bylaw. Adjust the distance to the vehicle infront if necessary.

196 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

You can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 197).X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; indirection:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in thespeedometer

Example: vehicles featuring automatictransmission with a DIRECT SELECT lever

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in themultifunction display

General notesIn the Assistance menu (Y page 246) of theon-board computer, you can select theassistance display.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 246).

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only

appears when the cruise control lever isactuated)

X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 246).

i You will see the stored speed for aboutfive seconds when you activate DISTRONICPLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou engage the parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle has skiddedRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, going into and coming out of abendRVehicles traveling on a different lineROther vehicles changing lanesRNarrow vehicles

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

RObstructions and stationary vehiclesRCrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

example, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane.Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lightswith crossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist aids you inkeeping the vehicle in the center of the drivinglane by means of moderate steeringinterventions at speeds of 0 - 125 mph(0 - 200 km/h).DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist monitorsthe area in front of your vehicle by means ofcamera system:, at the top of thewindshield.

At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist focuses onlane markings that are present.At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h)DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist focuses onthe vehicle in front, taking into account lanemarkings, e.g. when following vehicles in atraffic jam.DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order forthe Steering Assist function to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist can neitherreduce the risk of an accident nor override thelaws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS SteeringAssist cannot take into account road,weather or traffic conditions. DISTRONICPLUS Steering Assist is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does notdetect road and traffic conditions. If you arefollowing a vehicle which is driving towardsthe edge of the road, your vehicle could comeinto contact with the curb or other roadboundaries. In the case of deviations in roadmarkings, beware of other road users, e.g.cyclists, that are in the direct vicinity of yourvehicle.Obstacles such as building site huts on thelane or projecting out into the lane are notdetected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.after intentionally driving over a lanemarking,can be corrected at any time if you steerslightly in the opposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist cannotcontinuously keep your vehicle in lane. Insome cases, the steering intervention is notsufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane.In such cases, you must steer the vehicleyourself to ensure that it does not leave thelane.

200 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lane markings arepresent for one lane, e.g. in a constructionareaRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lanePay attention also to the important safetynotes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192).The steering interventions are carried outwith a limited steering moment. The systemrequires the driver to keep his hands on thesteering wheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the system will first alert youwith a visual warning. A steering wheelsymbol appears in the multifunction display.If you have still not started to steer and havenot taken hold of the steering wheel after fiveseconds, a warning tone also sounds toremind you to take control of the vehicle.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is thenswitched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUSremains active.

The system is switched to passive and nolonger assists you by performing steeringinterventions if:Ryou actively change lanesRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steering wheel ordo not steer for a prolonged period of time

i After you have finished changing lanes,DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist isautomatically active once more.

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does notprovide assistance:Ron very sharp cornersRif no lane markings or no clear lanemarkings have been detectedRif the vehicle in front is not detected atspeeds below 37 mph (60 km/h)Rin tire run-flat mode

Activating Steering AssistX Select the DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist function using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 248).The DTR+: Steering Assistant OnDTR+: Steering Assistant Onmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assistis activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist isactivated but is not ready for a steeringintervention, steering wheel symbol:appears in grey. If the system provides youwith support by means of steeringinterventions, symbol: is shown in green.

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Deactivating Steering AssistX Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS withSteering Assist function using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 248).The DTR+ Steering Assistant OffDTR+ Steering Assistant Offmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assistis deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated,DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist isdeactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has beenautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntilë: appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

202 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure untilëdisappears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.When the HOLD function is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically toposition P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it isautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

RACE START

Important safety notesi Observe the safety notes for the SPORThandling mode (Y page 74).

RACE START is intended solely for activationon dedicated race circuits.RACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start. The precondition forthis is a suitable high-grip road surface.

i RACE START is only available in AMGvehicles.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and it has reached anoperating temperature of approximately176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when theengine oil temperature in the multifunctiondisplay stops flashing.RSPORT handling mode is activated.(Y page 74)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Turn the drive program selector clockwise(Y page 171) until the RS lamp lights up.The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPRACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWNCancel: Paddle DOWN message appearsin the multifunction display.i If the activation conditions are no longerfulfilled, RACE START is canceled. TheRACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message appearsin the multifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 172).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 172).The RACE START Available DepressRACE START Available Depressgas pedalgas pedal message appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal fully within two seconds, RACESTART is canceled. The RACE START NotRACE START NotPossible See Operator's ManualPossible See Operator's Manualmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed rises to approximately3,500 rpm.The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake tostartstart message appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin five seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceledmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximumacceleration.The RACERACE STARTSTART ActiveActivemessage appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ isactivated. SPORT handling mode remainsactivated.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activationconditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACERACESTART Not Possible See Operator'sSTART Not Possible See Operator'sManualManualmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly withina short period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

AIRMATIC

Vehicle level

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels or

underneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicleor in the immediate vicinity of the wheelarches when the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:The vehicle is slightly lowered if:Ryou have selected comfort suspensiontuning andRyou lock the vehicle within approximately60 seconds of switching off the engine

You and people in the vicinity of the wheelarch or the underbody may thus becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of thewheel arch or the underbody when you lockthe vehicle.

! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if:Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning"Ryou switch off the engine and thenRyou lock the vehiclewithin approximately60 seconds

When parking, position your vehicle so thatit does not make contact with the curb asthe vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle couldotherwise be damaged.

If you unlock the vehicle within 60 seconds ofhaving switched the engine off, the vehicle islowered slightly when Comfort suspensionmode is selected.Your vehicle regulates its heightautomatically. All-round level control ensuresthe best possible suspension and constantground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.When you drive fast, the vehicle is loweredautomatically to improve driving safety and toreduce fuel consumption.

204 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The following vehicle levels are possible:RNormalRRaised: the vehicle is raised byapproximately 0.80 in (20 mm) whencompared with the normal levelRLowered: the vehicle is raised byapproximately 0.40 in (10 mm) whencompared with the normal level

The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels canbe set manually.The "Lowered” vehicle level is setautomatically:Rat speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)Rif you have selected "Sports tuning"(Y page 205)

Setting the vehicle levelSelect the "Normal" setting for normal roadsurfaces and "Raised" for driving with snowchains or on particularly poor road surfaces.Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Setting raised level

X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The vehicleheight is adjusted to raised level.The Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising message appears inthe display.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rdrive at a speed over approximately75 mph (120 km/h)Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 50 mph (80 km/h)

The "Raised level" remains active when youare not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal levelX Start the engine.

If indicator lamp: is lit:X Press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports orcomfort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Sportssuspension tuning is selected.The AIRMATIC SPORTAIRMATIC SPORT message appears inthe multifunction display.

Comfort tuningIn comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable.Therefore, select this mode if you favor amore comfortable driving style. Selectcomfort mode also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. on straight stretches offreeway.X Press button:.Indicator lamp= lights up. Comfort tuningis selected.The AIRMATIC COMFORTAIRMATIC COMFORT message appearsin the multifunction display.

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicleor in the immediate vicinity of the wheelarches when the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:The vehicle is slightly lowered if:Ryou have selected comfort suspensiontuning andRyou lock the vehicle within approximately60 seconds of switching off the engine

You and people in the vicinity of the wheelarch or the underbody may thus becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of thewheel arch or the underbody when you lockthe vehicle.

! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in(20 mm) if:Ryou have selected "Comfortable tuning"Ryou switch off the engine and thenRyou lock the vehiclewithin approximately60 seconds

When parking, position your vehicle so thatit does not make contact with the curb asthe vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle couldotherwise be damaged.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport +or Comfort

Sport mode

: Mode selection button; Button to store, recall and display the

selected mode

206 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

= Sport + mode indicator lamp? Sport mode indicator lamp

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures better contact with the road. Selectthis mode when employing a sporty drivingstyle, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button: once.Indicator lamp? lights up. You haveselected Sport mode.The AMG Ride Control SPORTAMG Ride Control SPORT messageappears in the multifunction display.

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension tuningin Sport + mode ensures the best possiblecontact with the road. Select this modeprimarily when driving on race circuits.If indicator lamps= and? are off:X Press button: twice.Indicator lamps= and? light up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMGAMG RideRide ControlControl SPORT +SPORT +messageappears in the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp? lights up:X Press button: once.Second indicator lamp= lights up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMGAMG RideRide ControlControl SPORT +SPORT +messageappears in the multifunction display.

Comfort modeWhen comfort mode is selected, the drivingcharacteristics of your vehicle are morecomfortable. Select this mode if you prefer acomfort-oriented driving style. Selectcomfort mode also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. on straight stretches ofhighway.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps= and? go out.You have selected Comfort mode.

The AMG Ride Control COMFORTAMG Ride Control COMFORTmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Storing and calling up settingsOnce the suspension tuning and driveprogram have been selected, you can storeand call up your settings using AMGbutton;.X To store: press AMG button; until youhear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button;.The stored suspension tuning and driveprogram are selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button;.Your selection appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Vehicle level

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicleor in the immediate vicinity of the wheelarches when the vehicle is being lowered.

The vehicle lowers when you press the buttonfor selecting the suspension tuning or theAMG button. The vehicle also lowers if it isstationary.

! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning hasbeen selected, the vehicle's groundclearance decreases. Make sure that noobjects become trapped or that the vehicledoes not become damaged, for example,on the curb.

i The vehicle levelmay change visibly at therear axle if you park the vehicle and theoutside temperature changes. If thetemperature drops, the vehicle level

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

lowers; with an increase in temperature,the vehicle level rises.

Changing the rear axle ride heightThis function is only available for the E 63AMG 4MATIC.The vehicle level at the rear axle depends onthe selected suspension tuning and thevehicle speed.The vehicle level at the rear axle changesduring the journey depending on the selectedsuspension tuning:RComfort: +0.4 in (+10 mm)RSport + and Sport: -0.6 in (-15 mm)When switching from Comfort to Sport orSport +, the rear axle lowers by approximately1.0 in (25 mm). When switching from Sportor Sport + to Comfort, the rear axle raises byapproximately 1.0 in (25 mm). This levelchange also takes place when the vehicle isstationary.If you drive faster than 105 mph (170 km/h),the rear axle ride height is set to a mediumlevel. This increases driving safety andreduces air resistance. If you then drive atspeeds below 93 mph (150 km/h), the rearaxle ride height is readjusted to the selectedsuspension tuning.

Load compensationThe vehicle can compensate differences inthe vehicle level by raising or lowering therear axle. This is the case, for example, ifpeople get out or if luggage is being loaded.Load compensation takes place if:Ra door or the trunk lid/tailgate is openedRthe parked vehicle is unlockedFor larger level changes, the engine must berunning.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot

take account of road, weather and trafficconditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as faras necessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheels must remain either on the groundor be fully raised. Observe the instructionsfor towing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels arepermanently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehiclewhenever a drive wheel spins due toinsufficient grip.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

208 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand six sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects intoconsideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g.overhanging loads, truck overhangs orloading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 346).

Example: side view

Example: top view

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area islocated on the headliner in the rearcompartment.The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness= light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rollingdetermine which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R or N Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

210 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC; Indicator lamp

If indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and theindicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 346).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention and brake applicationcan assist you during parking. You may alsouse PARKTRONIC (Y page 208).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Make sure thatno persons, animals or objects are in themaneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the ActiveParking Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not ata sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces

212 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to theparking space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered orovergrownmight be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 210) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of thevehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects.

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 209).Active Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces at right-angles to thedirection of travel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directlynext to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not support youwith parking spaces that are parallel or atright-angles to the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space asbeing blocked, for example by foliage orgrass paving blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle tomaneuver intoRthe parking space is bordered by anobstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

Example: detected parking space: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

Driving systems 213

Drivingandparking

Z

Active Parking Assist is switched onautomatically when driving forwards. Thesystem is operational at speeds of up toapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While inoperation, the system independently locatesand measures parking spaces on both sidesof the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to thedirection of travelRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 39.5 in (1.0m) longer than yourvehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) widerthan your vehicle

i In the case of parking spaces that are atright angles to the direction of travel,please ensure that the parking space islong enough to accommodate your vehicle.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears. By default, Active Parking Assistonly displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on thedriver's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. Whenparking on the driver's side, this must remainswitched on until you acknowledge the use ofActive Parking Assist by pressing theabutton on the multifunction steering wheel.The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or atright-angles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you areapproximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parkingi Vehicles with automatic transmission:When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brakeat all times. When backing up, drive at aspeed below approximately 6 mph(10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle is in theparking space.Maneuvering may be required in tightparking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DPark Assist Active Select DObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.

214 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill.

The Park Assist Active Select RPark Assist Active Select RObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.Further transmission shifts may benecessary.As soon as the parking procedure iscomplete, the Park Assist DisabledPark Assist Disabledmessage appears in the multifunction displayand you will hear a tone. The vehicle is nowparked. The vehicle is kept stationary withoutthe driver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled when youdepress the accelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brakeapplications. When Active Parking Assist isfinished, you must steer and brake againyourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messagesdisplayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 210).

Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include theposition and shape of the vehicles parkedin front and behind it and the conditions ofthe location. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you should

cancel the parking procedure with ActiveParking Assist.RYou can also engage forward gearprematurely. The vehicle redirects anddoes not drive as far into the parking space.Should a gear be changed too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. Asensible parking position can no longer beachieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist cansupport you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough at the front and the rear. Acurb is too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must notbe too wide, as the position of the vehiclemust not exceed an angle of 45° to thestarting position as it is maneuvering intothe parking space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

i Vehicles with automatic transmission:If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilstthe vehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the% button on the multifunction steeringwheel or pull away.

or

Driving systems 215

Drivingandparking

Z

X To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundingsand Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.Do not exceed a maximum speed ofapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) whenexiting a parking space. Otherwise ActiveParking Assist will be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired while the vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistPark AssistActive Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and BrakeObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results bywaiting for the steering procedure tocomplete before pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-aheadposition.

X Drive forwards and back up as instructedby the PARKTRONIC warning displays.

Once you have exited the parking spacecompletely, the steering wheel is moved tothe straight-ahead position. You hear a toneand the Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering, before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognizethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.

X Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceledmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on thecenter console (Y page 211).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceledautomatically if:Rthe transmission is shifted too earlyRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph(10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. Insuch cases the ÷ warning lamp lightsup in the instrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceledmessage.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.Vehicles with automatic transmission: if asystem malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

216 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Rear view camera

General notes

Example: Sedan

Rear view camera: is located in the handlestrip of the trunk lid.Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behindyour vehicle with guide lines in the COMANDdisplay.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text of messages shown in theCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rearview camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering andparking. Whenmaneuvering or parking, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the trunk lid/tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright light

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. Inthis event, have the camera position andsetting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of thevehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicyclerack).

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"setting is active in COMAND, see theseparate COMAND operating instructions.

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display with guide lines.

To deactivate: the rear view cameradeactivates if you shift the transmission to Por after driving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the COMAND displayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailer

Driving systems 217

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

; White guide line without turning thesteering wheel, vehicle width includingthe exterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)

C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

The guide lines are shown when thetransmission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Additional messages for vehicles withPARKTRONIC: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning display

Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: ifPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 208), anadditional operational readiness indicator willappear in COMAND display;. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in theCOMAND display.

218 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning thesteering wheel, vehicle width includingthe exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

? Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 217).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide lines:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide lines: as a guide,carefully reverse until you reach the endposition.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almostparallel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 217).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of theparking space until yellow guide line;reaches parking space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

Backing up with the steering wheel turned: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 219

Drivingandparking

Z

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactlyin front of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking aspossible.

Driving to the final position: White guide line at current steering wheel

angle; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the centerposition while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

; White lane with steering wheel straight= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

360° camera

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting offour cameras.The system analyzes images from thefollowing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear viewmirrors

The cameras capture the immediatesurroundings of the vehicle. The systemsupports you, e.g. when parking or if vision isrestricted at an exit.The 360° camera images can be shown in fullscreen mode or in six different split-screenviews on the COMAND display. A split-screenview also includes a top view of the vehicle.This view is calculated from the data suppliedby the installed cameras (virtual camera).The six split-screen views are:Rtop view and picture from the rear viewcamera (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and pictures from the rearwardfacing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and pictures from the forwardfacing mirror cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the dynamicguidelines are hidden.When you change between transmissionpositions D and R, you see the previouslyselected front or rear view.

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may showa distorted view of obstacles, show them

220 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera isnot a substitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safemaneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.You are always responsible for safety, andmust always pay attention to yoursurroundings when parking andmaneuvering. This applies to the areasbehind, in front of and beside the vehicle. Youcould otherwise endanger yourself andothers.The 360° camera will not function or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very brightlightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif you exit a heated garage in winter,resulting in a rapid change in temperatureRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which thecameras are installed are damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damageto objects or the vehicle.Guide lines are always shown at road level.

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360°cameraRthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignitionlock

RCOMAND is switched on, see the separateCOMAND operating instructionsRthe 360° Camera360° Camera function is activatedActivating the 360° camera using theSYS buttonX Press and hold the W button for longerthan 2 seconds, see the separate COMANDoperating instructions.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Rfull screen display with the image fromthe front cameraRfull screen display with the image fromthe rear camera

Activating the 360° camera withCOMANDX Press the W button; see the separateCOMAND operating Instructions.

orX Select SystemSystem by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.

X Select 360° Camera360° Camera and pressW toconfirm.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and theimage from the front camera orRa split screen with top view and theimage from the rear view camera

For further information about the COMANDcontroller, see the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can beautomatically displayed by engaging reversegear.

Driving systems 221

Drivingandparking

Z

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear setting is active in COMAND, see theseparate COMAND operating instructions.

X To show the360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display in split-screenmode. Yousee the top view of the vehicle and theimage from the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysX To switch between split screen views:switch to the line with the vehicle icons bysliding ZV the COMAND controller.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller andselect one of the vehicle symbols.

X To switch to full screen mode: selectFull ScreenFull Screen by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.

i The full screen option is only available inthe following views:RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop view with picture from the frontcamera

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. Obstacles are not shown by thesystem in the following locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle/trunk lid handle

Rvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between thevarious cameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than thebottom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line for the maximumsteering angle

222 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

B Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rearof the vehicle

C Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)D Red guide line at a distance of

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

E Bumper

The guide lines are shown when thetransmission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the frontcamera

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the frontof the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking tires at currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance ofapproximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the frontof the vehicle

B Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from thefront of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera imageenlarged

; Red guide line at a distance ofapproximately 12 in (0.30 m) from therear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating thedistance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Driving systems 223

Drivingandparking

Z

Top view with picture from the mirrorcamera

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing mirror camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right sideof vehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the mirror camerasetting for the rear-facing view.

Wide-angle function

Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONICdisplay: Symbol for the full screen settingwith rear

view camera image; PARKTRONIC warning display

If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONICand the function is active (Y page 211),warning displays; in the COMAND displayare also active or light up accordingly.

PARKTRONIC appears:Rin split screen view as red or yellowbrackets around the vehicle icon in the topview, orRin the full screen view, on the right-handside at the bottomas red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon

i The full screen display can also beselected as front view.

Select this view when you are driving out ofan exit and the view of crossing traffic isrestricted, for example.

Object detection

: Symbol for the full screen settingwith rearview camera image

; Bar for marking a detected object

In full screen mode, the 360° camera candetect both moving and stationary objects. If,for example, a pedestrian or another vehicleis detected, these objects are marked withbars;. The system is only able to detect andmark stationary objects when your vehicle ismoving. By contrast, stationary objects willalways be detected and marked.

Exiting 360° camera display modeAs soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of19 mph (30 km/h) with the functionactivated, the function switches off. TheCOMAND display switches back to thepreviously selected view. You can also switchthe display by selecting the& symbol in the

224 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

display and pressingW the COMANDcontroller to confirm.The 360° camera display is also ended if youselect transmission position P.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to125 mph (200 km/h) range. IfATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicatorsof fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration on the part of the driver, itsuggests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less thanapproximately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if thesurface is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving at a speedbelow 37 mph (60 km/h) or above124 mph (200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUSactive steer assist activatedRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when youcontinue your journey and starts assessingyour tiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status informationdisplayed in the assistance menu(Y page 246) of the on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for AttentionAssist using the on-board computer(Y page 246).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined byATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bardisplay in five levels from high to low.RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and a warning cannot beissued, the System PassiveSystem Passive messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speedbelow 37 mph (60 km/h) or above124 mph (200 km/h).

Driving systems 225

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 248).The system determines the attention levelof the driver depending on the settingselected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attentionlevel is set to normal.Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected byAttention Assist is adapted accordingly andthe driver is warned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theÀ symbol and OFF appear in themultifunction display in the assistancedisplay when the engine is running.When ATTENTION ASSIST has beendeactivated, it is automatically reactivatedafter the engine has been stopped. Thesensitivity selected corresponds to the lastselection activated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration are detected, a warningappears in the multifunction display:Attention Assist: Take a Break!Attention Assist: Take a Break!In addition to the message shown in themultifunction display, you will then hear awarning tone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing thea button on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTstill detects increasing lapses inconcentration, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. This will onlyhappen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detectstypical indicators of fatigue or increasinglapses in concentration.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 226) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 228).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive a visual and audiblecollision warning. Blind Spot Assist usessensors in the rear bumper for monitoringpurposes.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, andmaintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tampering

226 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

with, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,snow or sprayRnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles orbicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Example: Sedan

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may

be indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), theindicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assistis operational.

Driving systems 227

Drivingandparking

Z

If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on thecorresponding side lights up red. Thiswarningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 248) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle with camera:, which ismounted at the top of the windshield. ActiveLaneKeepingAssist detects lanemarkings onthe road and can warn you before you leaveyour lane unintentionally.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. Thereis a risk of an accident.

228 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by LaneKeeping Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive(Y page 248).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,

the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 246) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

StandardIf StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. ahighway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 229

Drivingandparking

Z

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance packageconsists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191),Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 230) andActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 233).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of thevehicle, tomonitor the area to the sides of thevehicle which the driver is unable to see. Awarning display in the exterior mirrors drawsyour attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audiblewarning. If a risk of lateral collision isdetected, corrective braking may help youavoid a collision. Before a course-correctingbrake application, Active Blind Spot Assistevaluates the space in the direction of traveland at the sides of the vehicle. For this, ActiveBlind Spot Assist uses radar sensors whichare pointed in the direction of travel.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and isnot a substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist mayneither give warnings nor intervene in suchsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, andmaintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpersand behind a cover in the radiator grill. Makesure that the bumpers and the cover in theradiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. Therear sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assistmay otherwise no longer work properly.

230 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficientdistance on the side for other traffic orobstacles.

Example: Sedan

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle anddirectly next to your vehicle, as shown in thediagram.The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow orspray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated or indicated with a delay.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detectnarrow vehicles, such as motorcycles orbicycles, or may only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This may

be the case if there are vehicles at the edgeof their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active atspeeds below approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp: in the exteriormirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out andActive Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on thecorresponding side lights up red. Thiswarningis always given when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active BlindSpot Assist is no longer active.

Driving systems 231

Drivingandparking

Z

The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to changelanes and a vehicle is detected in the sidemonitoring range, you receive a visual andacoustic collision warning. You then hear adouble warning tone and red warninglamp: flashes. If the turn signal remains on,detected vehicles are indicated by theflashing of red warning lamp:. There are nofurther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk ofan accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou or makes a course-correcting brakeapplication. Always maintain a safe distanceat the sides.

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp: flashes in theexterior mirror and a dual warning tonesounds. In addition,; appears in themultifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. Aninappropriate course-correcting brakeapplication may be interrupted at any time ifyou steer slightly in the opposite direction oraccelerate, for example.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between20mph (30 km/h) and 120mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to thedriving situation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of yourvehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 248) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

232 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of camerasystem: at the top of the windshield.Various different areas to the front, rear andside of your vehicle are also monitored withthe aid of the radar sensor system. ActiveLaneKeepingAssist detects lanemarkings onthe road and can warn you before you leaveyour lane unintentionally. If you do not reactto the warning, a lane-correcting applicationof the brakes can bring the vehicle back intothe original lane.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system mustbe operational

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws ofphysics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannottake account of road and weather conditions.It may not recognize traffic situations. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannotcontinuously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.Terminate the intervention in a non-criticaldriving situation.

The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthe radar sensors in the front or rearbumpers or the radiator grill are dirty, e.g.obscured by snowRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Driving systems 233

Drivingandparking

Z

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent laneand there are broken lanemarkings detected,no lane-correcting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brakeapplication.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist only detectstraffic conditions or road users to a limitedextent. In very rare cases, the system maymake an inappropriate brake application, e.g.after intentionally driving over a solid lanemarking. There is a risk of an accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certaincircumstances the vehicle will brake briefly

on one side. This is meant to assist you inbringing the vehicle back to the original lane.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunctiondisplay.A lane-correcting brake application can bemade after driving over a lane markingrecognize as being solid or broken. Beforethis, a warning must be given by means ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel.In addition, a lane with lane markings on bothsides must be recognized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has beendetected in the adjacent lane. The followingvehicles can have an influence on brakeapplication: oncoming traffic, vehicles thatare overtaking and vehicles that are drivingparallel to your vehicle.

i A further lane-correcting brakeapplication can only occur after yourvehicle has returned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake oraccelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.Ryou have switched on the turn signals.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ran obstacle has been detected in the lanein which you are driving.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.

There is a possibility that the Active LaneAssistant could misjudge the given traffic

234 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

situation. An inappropriate brake applicationmay be interrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRswitch on the turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application isinterrupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlanemarkings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive(Y page 248).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 246) are shown in green. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is ready for use.If StandardStandard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoidan obstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. ahighway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 235

Drivingandparking

Z

236

Useful information ............................ 238Important safety notes .................... 238Displays and operation .................... 238Menus and submenus ...................... 241Display messages ............................. 257Indicator and warning lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 285

237

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed ormalfunctioned, you may not recognizefunction restrictions in systems relevant tosafety. The operating safety of your vehiclemay be impaired. There is a risk of anaccident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the

multifunction display. You should thereforemake sure your vehicle is operating safely atall times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is notoperating safely may cause an accident.Hybrid vehicles: Always read the HYBRIDoperating instructions. You could otherwisefail to recognize dangers, e.g. due to high-voltage.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 31).

Displays and operation

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over248‡(120†), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the left-hand side(Y page 31).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.

238 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.The outside temperature display is in themultifunction display (Y page 240).Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 189):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 191):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Displays and operation 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separateoperating instructionsRHides display messages/callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction display

: Text field; Menu bar= Drive program (Y page 168)? Transmission position (Y page 167)A Permanent display: outside temperature

or speed (Y page 249)X To show menu bar;: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar; disappears after a few seconds.

240 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Text field: shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Shift recommendation

(Y page 172)XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 212)CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 189)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 134)¤ ECO start/stop function

(Y page 163)ë HOLD function (Y page 202)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on thesteering wheel to call up the menu bar andselect a menu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 239).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 241)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 243)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 244)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 245)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 246)RServ.Serv. menu (Y page 249)RSettingsSettings menu (settings) (Y page 249)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 253)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press9 or: to select From StartFrom Startor From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 242).The From StartFrom Start trip computer isautomatically reset when:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

Menus and submenus 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer isautomatically reset if the value exceeds9999 hours or 99,999 miles.

ECO display

Example: ECO displayX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will beautomatically reset.Further information on the ECO display(Y page 185).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thecurrent fuel consumption (not for AMGvehicles) and the approximate range.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amountof fuel left in the fuel tank, the display showsa vehicle being refueledC instead of therange.

Digital speedometer

: Shift recommendation (Y page 172); Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the followingfunctions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

i When you reset the values in the "ECOdisplay", the values in the trip computer"From Start" are likewise reset. When youreset the values in the trip computer "FromStart", the values in the "ECO display"arelikewise reset.

242 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation on navigation, see the separateoperating instructions.X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol

When a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distanceindicator shortens towards the top of thedisplay as you approach the point of theannounced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= New lane during a change of direction? Uninterrupted laneA Lane recommendationB Change-of-direction symbol

On multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendation= for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Menus and submenus 243

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new routeROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i Station; is displayed with the stationfrequency or station name. The memoryposition is only displayed along withstation; if this has been stored.

X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the stationlist: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

i For information on switching wavebandand storing stations; see the separateoperating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current title

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND and activate audioCD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desiredtrack: has been reached.If you press and hold9 or:, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

244 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Video DVD operation

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current sceneX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desiredscene: has been reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see theseparate operating instructions).

X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming callX Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in theTelTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.You can accept a call even if you are not inthe TelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.Dialing an entry from the phone bookX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

Menus and submenus 245

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing options:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 246)RActivating/deactivatingESP®(Y page 247)RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 247)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSIST (Y page 248)RActivating/deactivating the distancewarning function (Y page 247)RActivating/deactivating Steering Assist ofDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 248)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assistor Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 248)RActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist or Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 248)

Displaying the assistance graphicX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select Assist.Assist.GraphicGraphic.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic (Y page 197).

X Press9 or: to display theATTENTION ASSIST assessment(Y page 225).

246 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

The assistance graphic can display the statusof and information from other driving systemsor driving safety systems.The assistance graphic shows:Rtheé symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 225) is deactivated.Rthe lanemarkings as bright lineswhen LaneKeeping Assist (Y page 228) or Active LaneKeeping Assist (Y page 233) is activated.Rtheæ symbol when the distancewarning function (Y page 70) isdeactivated.Rtheæ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 76) is deactivated.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

i Observe the "Important safety notes"section in the description of ESP(Y page 72).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelActivating/deactivating ESP® on AMGvehicles (Y page 74).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 72).X Start the engine.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectESPESP.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 289).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 258).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theassistance graphic shows theæ symbolin the multifunction display.

For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 76).

Activating/deactivating the distancewarning functionX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select DistanceDistanceWarningWarning.

Menus and submenus 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

When the distance warning function isdeactivated, the assistance graphic showstheæ symbol in the multifunction display.Further information on the distance warningfunction (Y page 70).

Activating/deactivating SteeringAssist of DISTRONIC PLUSX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Using9 or:, select DTR+:DTR+: Steer.Steer.Asst.Asst.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When the steering assist of DISTRONICPLUS is activated, themultifunction displayshows the DTR+: Steering AssistantDTR+: Steering AssistantOnOn message.

For further information on the steering assistof DISTRONIC PLUS: (Y page 200).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select AttentionAttentionAssistAssist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or SensitiveSensitive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in the

multifunction display in the assistancegraphics display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 225).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AsstBlind Spot Asst.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 226).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 230).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keep. AssistLane Keep. Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist or Active LaneKeeping Assist is activated, themultifunction display shows the lanemarkings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.

For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 228).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 233).

248 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Maintenance menu

In the ServServ menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 257)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 380)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 380)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 341)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettSett menu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 249)RChanging the light settings (Y page 250)RChanging the vehicle settings(Y page 251)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 252)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 253)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whethercertain displays appear in kilometers or milesin the multifunction display.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInst. ClusterInst. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the TripTrip menuRodometer and the trip odometerRtrip computerRcurrent consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the NaviNavimenuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInst. ClusterInst. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent DisplayPermanent Display function.You will see the selected setting OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or AdditionalAdditionalSpeedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h]/AdditionalAdditionalSpeedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i The speed is displayed in km/h/mphaccording to the setting.

Lights

Setting the brightness of the instrumentcluster lighting and switchesThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicleinterior can be adjusted using theBrightness Display/Switches:Brightness Display/Switches: function.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightness Display/Switches:Brightness Display/Switches:function.You will see the selected setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from Level 1Level 1 toLevel 5Level 5 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offi This function is not available in Canada.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DayDayLightsLights function.If the Day LightsDay Lights function has beenswitched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 129).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light +/-.Amb. Light +/-. function.You will see the selected setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from OffOff to LevelLevel55 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Setting the ambient lighting colorX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmbient Light ColorAmbient Light Color function.

250 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set thecolor to SOLARSOLAR, NEUTRALNEUTRAL or POLARPOLAR.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Activating/deactivating surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select theSurround LightingSurround Lighting function.If the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn theSmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the SurroundSurroundLightingLighting function and the light switch is settoÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 129).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for

60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the trunk lid/tailgate, the exterior lighting goes off after5 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, thefollowing light up:RParking lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Light. DelayLight. Delay function,the interior lighting remains on for20 seconds after you remove the key from theignition lock.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLight. DelayLight. Delay function.If the Light. DelayLight. Delay function has beenswitched on, the vehicle interior isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press: or9 to select the VehicleVehiclesubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press: or9 to select the Auto.Auto.Door LocksDoor Locks function.When the Auto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locks function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you activate the Auto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locksfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 89).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press: or9 to select the VehicleVehiclesubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunctiondisplay lights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ismaking adjustments, make sure that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of thesteering wheel.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheeladjustment in the opposite direction to thatin which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function isactivated, the vehicle steering wheel isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 121).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function.If the Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function isactivated, the vehicle seat belt is shown inorange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 57).

Switching the fold-in mirrors with thelocking feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 125).This function is only available in Canada.

252 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

When you activate the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked. If youunlock the vehicle and then open a door, theexterior mirrors fold out again.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out

If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors by pressing button:, the exteriormirrors will not fold out automatically(Y page 123).You can then only fold out the exteriormirrorsusing button:.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to selectNoNo or YesYes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Status indicator for ECO start/stop

function (Y page 163)X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

Upshift indicator UPUP= indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UPUP= fades out othermessages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †) the oil temperature is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.

Menus and submenus 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

SETUP

: Drive program (CC/SS+SS+/MM); ESP® mode (ONON/OFFOFF) or SPORT handling

mode (SPORTSPORT)= Suspension tuning (COMFORTCOMFORT/SPORTSPORT/

SPORT+SPORT+)SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode and thesuspension tuning.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

orX Briefly press the AMG button on the centerconsole (Y page 206).

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Lap; RACETIMER

The RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the functionon public roads.

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum ofsixteen laps. The 16th lap can only becompleted with Finish LapFinish Lap.

254 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Confirm YesYes witha.

The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn thekey to position 2 or 3 and then pressa toconfirm StartStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race Timer?Reset Race Timer? appears in themultifunction display.

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap

Menus and submenus 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

256 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 202)RParking (Y page 182)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for themessages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You cancall up the display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 257

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function andhill start assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill startassist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.The$ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.

258 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsIf ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 259

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable dueto a malfunction.BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST andPRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

260 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEInoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedCurrently LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

PRE-SAFE® brake or Adaptive Brake Assist of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST is temporarily not operational.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper(Y page 346).

X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 74).

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedFunctions LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

PRE-SAFE® brake or Adaptive Brake Assist of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST is not available due to a malfunction. BASPLUS or the distance warning signal may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 261

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 41).

6Front LeftFront LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionServiceServiceRequiredRequired or FrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear LeftRear LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Rear RightRear RightMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear CenterRear CenterMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lampalso lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

262 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionServiceServiceRequiredRequired or RightRightSide CurtainSide CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowcurtain air bag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 263

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system mayinterpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check thefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 48).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

264 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsFor further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 48).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag EnabledAirbag EnabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than thesystem's weight threshold is located on the front-passengerseatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check thefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (OccupantClassification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag(Y page 48).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

Display messages 265

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 48).

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck LeftCheck LeftCornering LightCornering Light orCheck RightCheck RightCornering LightCornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

266 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 137).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheckCheckRight Mirror TurnRight Mirror TurnSignalSignal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brakeand BrakeLampsLampsorCheck RightCheck RightTail and BrakeTail and BrakeLampsLamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeamorCheck RightCheck RightHigh BeamHigh Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 137).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft LicenseLicensePlate LampPlate LamporCheckCheckRight LicenseRight LicensePlate LampPlate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear Fog LampRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 267

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParkingParkingLampLamporCheck FrontCheck FrontRight Parking LampRight Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft reversereverseLampLamporCheck RightCheck RightReverse LampReverse Lamp

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarkerSidemarkerLampLamporCheck FrontCheck FrontRight SidemarkerRight SidemarkerLampLamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarkerSidemarkerLampLamporCheck RearCheck RearRight SidemarkerRight SidemarkerLampLamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunningRunningLightLightorCheck RightCheck RightDaytime RunningDaytime RunningLightLight

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive HeadlampsActive HeadlampsInoperativeInoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

268 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message isdisplayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 339).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Display messages 269

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

270 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 338).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 338).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Display messages 271

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add 1(Add 1 quart)quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 338).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 338).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Ultra Low-sulfurUltra Low-sulfurDiesel Fuel OnlyDiesel Fuel Only

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below thereserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFURHIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm sulfur MAXIMUM).

¸Replace Air FilterReplace Air Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and mustbe replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!Check Fuel FilterCheck Fuel Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. Thewater must be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

272 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ØCheckCheck AdditiveAdditive SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The DEF tank is empty.X Have the DEF tank filled as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop (Y page 180).

ØRemaining Starts:Remaining Starts:1616

The DEF level has fallen to a minimum.X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop (Y page 180).

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨or°Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

¨or°Vehicle RisingVehicle RisingPlease WaitPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. Awarning tone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨or°STOP VehicleSTOP VehicleVehicle Too LowVehicle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a shortperiod.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Display messages 273

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the frontfender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movementis too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise thevehicle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨or°MalfunctionMalfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handlingcharacteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 202).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 202).

274 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator'sOperator'sManualManualorActiveActiveLane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssistAssistInoperativeInoperativeorActivActive Lane Keepinge Lane KeepingAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 275

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator'sOperator'sManualManualorActiveActiveBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the sensors (Y page 346).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperativeorActivActive Blind Spote Blind SpotAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistPark AssistCanceledCanceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that themultifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 212).

276 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Park AssistPark AssistInoperativeInoperative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again afterapproximately ten minutes (Y page 212).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistPark AssistFinishedFinished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 191).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 191).

Display messages 277

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is also temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper(Y page 346).

X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.The following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)RPRE-SAFE® BrakeRDISTRONIC PLUS Steering AssistA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSPassivePassive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 191).

278 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DTR+: SteeringDTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringDTR+: SteeringAssist.Assist.InoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist is faulty.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control(Y page 189).

Display messages 279

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

RectifyRectifyTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 380).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 383).

CheckCheckTiresTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 354).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 380).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

280 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

WarningWarningTire MalfunctionTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 354).

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

TirePress.TirePress.Sensor(s) MissingSensor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperative NoInoperative NoWheel SensorsWheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 281

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Apply BrakeApply Braketo Shift from 'P'to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Risk of VehicleRisk of VehicleRolling AwayRolling AwayVehicle Not in 'P'Vehicle Not in 'P'

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, Nor D.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only ShiftOnly Shiftto 'P' whento 'P' whenVehicle isVehicle isStationaryStationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

N Sedan: the trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

A Wagon: the tailgate is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the tailgate.

282 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Mor? The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

_RearRear LeftLeft BackrestBackrestnot Latchednot Latched or RearRearRightRight BackrestBackrest notnotLatchedLatched

Sedan with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/orright-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

ÐPower SteeringPower SteeringMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 340).

Display messages 283

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 85).

ÂDon't Forget YourDon't Forget YourKeyKey

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds andis only a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when youleave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is runningbecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

284 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white displaymessage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GOfunctions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Detected inKey Detected inVehicleVehicle

The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle duringlocking.X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.

ÂRemove 'Start'Remove 'Start'Button and InsertButton and InsertKeyKey

The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. Awarning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂClose Doors toClose Doors toLock VehicleLock Vehicle

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).The warning tone ceases.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 285

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Youare driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. You are drivingfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

286 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the vehicle ismoving. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the brakingcharacteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy themalfunction.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 287

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS,COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function andhill start assist are also deactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.

288 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®,PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, forexample, are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)֌!

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, EBD,PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill startassist, for example, are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 289

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP®warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 72).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 72).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORThandling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with theconditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORThandling mode" section (Y page 74).

290 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST,PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill startassist are unavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

For further information about SRS, see (Y page 41).

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 291

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with a gasoline engine)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellowCheck Enginewarninglamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect inthese states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry(Y page 179).X Start the engine three to four times after refueling.If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergencyrunning mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

292 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gauge isat the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 293

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 339).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isunder 248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).

294 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 339).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures under 248‡ (120†), drive to the nextqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speedselected.X Increase the distance.

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76).For further information on the distance warning function ofCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST: (Y page 70).

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 295

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 182).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 354).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 380).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

296 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Useful information ............................ 298Stowage areas .................................. 298Features ............................................. 316

297

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid/tailgate is open when the engine isrunning, especially if the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid/tailgate. Never drive with thetrunk lid/tailgate open.

The handling characteristics of a ladenvehicle are dependent on the distribution ofthe load within the vehicle. For this reason,you should observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the gross axleweight rating of the vehicle (includingoccupants). The values are specified on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar ofthe driver's door.RThe trunk/cargo compartment is thepreferred place to store objects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards aspossible and as low down in the trunk/cargo compartment as possible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear orfront seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteningmaterials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RWhen transporting objects in the cargocompartment, the combined cargo coverand net must always be installed (cargocompartment cover and cargo net).RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.

298 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do notprotrude from stowage spaces, parcel netsor stowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard,pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulkyobjects in the trunk/cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298).

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

i The glove box can be ventilated(Y page 156).

The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position1.

Eyeglasses compartment

There is a compartment to stow eyeglassesin the headliner on the driver's side.X To open: pull down eyeglassescompartment: by the handle.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

All models except AMG vehicles

Stowage areas 299

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.Cover: moves back.i A stowage compartment is located underthe cup holder at the front of the centerconsole.

Stowage compartment under thearmrest

AMG vehiclesX To open: press left-hand button; or right-hand button:.The stowage compartment opens.

All models except AMG vehiclesX To open: pull handle: up.The armrest folds out.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB connection and an AUX IN connectionor a Media Interface are installed in thestowage compartment. A Media Interfaceis a universal interface for mobile audio

equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player(see the separate COMAND OperatingInstructions).

Stowage compartment under the frontseats

G WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for thestowage compartment, the cover may not beable to restrain the items. Items may bethrown out of the stowage compartment andhit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the trunk/cargocompartment.

The maximum permissible load of thestowage compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To open: pull handle: up and foldcover; forwards.

i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, thefire extinguisher is located in the stowagecompartment under the driver's seat.

Stowage compartment in the rear! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on thearmrests when they are folded out as youcould damage them.

300 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

! Close the cover of the stowagecompartment before folding the rear seatarmrest back into the seat backrest.

X To open: fold down seat armrest;.X Fold cover: of the armrest upwards.

Stowage net in the rear

: Stowage net

Storage pockets

G WARNINGStorage bags are intended for storing light-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported in thestorage bag. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Storage bags cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.

The stowage pockets are on the back of thedriver's and front-passenger's seats.

Stowage netsStowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the left and right-hand sides of the trunk/cargo compartment.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 298).

Skibag

Unfolding the skibag and loading skis

G WARNINGThe skibag in conjunction with the lashingstraps cannot restrain any objects other thanskis.Vehicle occupants could be struck in theevent of sudden braking or an accident, forinstance, if you:Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edgedobjects in the skibagRdo not secure the skibag with the lashingstraps

There is a risk of accident and injury.Store only skis in the skibag. Always securethe skibag with the lashing straps so that itcannot move around.

Stowage areas 301

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X Press release catches; together and folddown cover:.

X Pull skibag: into the vehicle interior andunfold it.

X Open the trunk lid.

X Press release catch:.The flap opens downwards.

X Slide the skis into the skibag from thetrunk.

X Pull strap: tight by the loose end until theskis are held firmly inside the skibag.

X Engage hook: in securing ring;.X Pull the strap tight by the loose end.

Removing skis and foldingup the skibag

X Loosen the two straps.X Remove hook: from securing ring;.X Take the skis out of the skibag.X Close the flap in the trunk.X Smooth out the skibag and fold it up.X Put the skibag into the backrest.X Fold the cover back up.

i You should always close the flap in thetrunk if you do not require the skibag. Thiswill prevent unauthorized access to thetrunk from the vehicle interior.

302 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Removing the skibag

If you would like to clean or dry the skibag, itcan be removed.X Open the trunk lid.X Press release catch:.Flap; folds down.

X Press catch= in and pull out frame?containing the skibag.

Through-loading facility in the rear

The through-loading facility is opened fromthe trunk.X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X Press release catch:.The flap opens downwards.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298).

Through-loading facility in the rearbench seat (Sedan)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could foldforwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot berestrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298).The left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded down separately toincrease the trunk capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forward

i Vehicles with memory function: when youfold one or both parts of the rear seatbackrest forwards, the respective frontseat moves forward slightly, whennecessary, in order to avoid contact.

Stowage areas 303

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Vehicles without memory function: ifnecessary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forwards.

X Open the trunk.X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seatbackrest release handle:.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.The rear seat head restraints are lowered.

X Fold rear seat backrest; forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Folding the seat backrest back! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold rear seat backrest: back until itengages.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in themultifunction display in the instrumentcluster. A warning tone also sounds.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 112).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

i You should always engage the rear seatbackrests if you do not need the through-loading feature. This will preventunauthorized access to the trunk from thevehicle interior.

EASY-PACK through-loading facility inthe rear bench seat (Wagon)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could foldforwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargocompartment cannot be restrained by theseat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298).

304 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Folding the rear seat backrest forward! When folding the rear seat backrestforwards, ensure that there are no itemslying on the seat cushions. These itemscould otherwise be damaged or couldthemselves damage the rear seats.

The left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded forwards separatelyto increase the cargo compartment capacity.The combined cargo cover and net canremain installed.i When you fold one or both parts of therear seat backrests forwards, theheadrests are also lowered if necessary. Inthe case of vehicles with memory function,the respective front seat ismoved forwardsslightly to avoid contact with the seatbehind it.

X Vehicles without memory function: ifnecessary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forwards.

X Pull the left-hand or right-hand releasehandle at the rear in cargo

compartment: or at the side besidebackrests;.The corresponding backrest foldsforwards.

X Pull the left-hand or right-hand releasehandle at the rear in cargocompartment:.The corresponding backrest foldsforwards.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in themultifunction display in the instrumentcluster. A warning tone also sounds.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 112).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Stowage areas 305

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Securing cargo

Plastic hooks (Sedan)

On vehicles without a through-loading featurein the rear bench seat, six plastic hooks areinstalled to the trunk floor.

Cargo tie-down rings

General notesObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines(Y page 298).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Trunk/cargo compartment

Cargo tie down rings: (Sedan)

Cargo tie down rings: (Wagon)

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items ofluggage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum loadof 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

306 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

WagonX To open: press bag hook: (arrow).Bag hook: slides out.

X To close: press bag hook: until itengages.

EASY-PACK cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the eventof an accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargocompartment higher than the lower edge ofthe side windows. Do not place heavyobjects on top of the cargo compartmentcover.

The cargo compartment cover and the cargonet are attached to anchorages on the rightand left in the cargo compartment as acombined cargo cover and net.

When the tailgate is opened, the cargocompartment cover is automatically raised tomake loading easier. It is automaticallylowered again when the tailgate is closed.When the cargo compartment cover isclipped in, there should be no objectsobstructing the downwards movement of thecover in the cargo compartment when thetailgate is closed. The cargo compartmentcover will otherwise be raised again.

Extending/retracting the cargocompartment cover

X To extend: pull cargo compartmentcover: back by grab handle; and clipit into the retainers on the left and right.

X To retract: unhook cargo compartmentcover: from the retainers on the left andright and guide it forwards by grabhandle; until it is fully retracted.

Stowage areas 307

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Installing/removing the combinedcargo cover and net

You can reach the combined cargo cover andnet to install and remove it from the cargocompartment and, with the seat backrestfolded forwards, from the left-hand rear door.X Make sure that the cargo net and the cargocompartment cover are rolled up.

X To remove: press button;.X Fold the combined cargo cover and netforwards on the left-hand side with the seatbackrest folded forwards, and fold itbackwards with the seat backrest foldedup.

X First, detach the combined cargo cover andnet from left-hand catch: and thenremove it from right-hand fixture=.

X To install: push the combined cargo coverand net up to the stop into right-handfixture=.

X Place the combined cargo cover and netinto the left-hand fixture and push it intocatch: until the combined cargo coverand net engages audibly.

X Make sure that red lock statusindicator? is no longer visible. Thecombined cargo cover and net willotherwise not be locked in place.

Attaching the combined cargo coverand net to the rear seat backrest! If you have attached the combined cargocover and net to a rear seat backrest thatis folded forwards, do not fold the backrestback.

X Fold the left and right seat backrestforwards (Y page 304).

X Insert combined cargo cover and net;into two guides: and push it up to thestop in the direction of the arrow.

308 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Cargo net (Wagon)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo net cannot secure orrestrain heavy objects, items of luggage andheavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecuredload during sudden changes in direction,braking or in the event of an accident. Thereis an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo net.

It is important to use a cargo net if you loadthe vehicle with small objects above the seatbackrests. For safety reasons, always use acargo net when transporting loads.

Cargo net without cargo compartmentenlargement

X Pull the cargo net up by tab: and hook itinto eyelets;.

Cargo net with cargo compartmentenlargement

X Make sure that the cargo net is attached tothe rear seat backrest (Y page 308).

X Guide the cargo net up by tab: and hookit into eyelets;.

Coat hooks on the tailgate

: Coat hook

EASY-PACK trunk box

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the load surface moves up, your handsmay become trapped on the frame of theEASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.When the load surface moves up, make surethat your hands are not within the sweep ofthe load surface. If someone becomestrapped, carefully push the center of the loadsurface downward.

Stowage areas 309

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulledout, no objects may be placed on the frameof the box, nor should the frame be pushedfrom above. Otherwise, the box could bedamaged.

! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objectscan damage the EASY-PACK trunk box andthen be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed orfragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.Always store and secure these or similarobjects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.

! If you exceed the maximum permittedload of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objectscan be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunkbox and strike vehicle occupants. There isa risk of injury, particularly in the event ofsudden braking or a sudden change indirection.Always observe the maximum permittedload of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Alwaysstore and secure heavy objects in the trunkoutside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a loadof above approx. 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom ofthe box moves downward until it is rests onthe mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overloadingof the box is avoided.

Adjusting the height to any position

X Pull the box out by handle: in thedirection of the arrow all the way to thestop.

X Lowering the load surface: push thecenter of load surface; down by hand inthe direction of the arrow until loadsurface; has reached the desiredposition and the box is the desired size.

X To raise the load surface: press switch=.Load surface; of the box moves upautomatically.

X To stow the box: push the box in byhandle: all the way to the stop.

Removing and installing

X To install: insert retainer; of box: intoslots=

310 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X Raise box: and press hooksA intoanchorage? as far as they will go.

X Turn left-hand rotating catchB clockwiseand right-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise by 90°.

X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise and right-handrotating catchB clockwise by 90°.

X Move box: downwards and pull it outfrom anchorages?.

i Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flatsurface after removal, e.g. on a suitableshelf.

EASY-PACK load-securing kit (Wagon)

Components and storageThe EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows youto use your cargo compartment for a varietyof purposes. The accessory parts are locatedunder the cargo compartment floor.X Open the EASY-PACK folding luggage-compartment floor (Y page 313).

EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts: Telescopic rod; Bag containing the brackets and luggage

holder

Inserting the brackets into the loadingrail

X Insert bracket: into the center of loadingrail?.

X Press release button; and pushbracket: into the desired position inloading rail?.

X Let go of release button;.X Press locking button=.Bracket: is locked in loading rail?.

X If necessary, fold cargo tie-down ringAupwards.

Luggage holder! Only use the luggage holder to securecargo with a maximum weight of 15.4 lbs(7 kg) andwith dimensions that the luggageholder can safely and securely contain.

The luggage holder can be used to securelight loads against the side wall of the cargocompartment to prevent them from movingaround.

Stowage areas 311

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To install: insert two bracketsA into theleft or right loading rail (Y page 311).

X Press release button: of the luggageholder and pull the strap out slightly.

X Insert luggage holder; into bracketsAand, while doing so, press release button= and push the luggage holder downwardsuntil it engages.

X Press release button: of the luggageholder and pull the strap out in the directionof the arrow.

X Place the load between the strap and thecargo compartment side wall.

X Using one hand, press locking button: ofthe luggage holder.

X With your other hand, let the strap go slowlyuntil the load is secured.

X Make sure that locking button? onbracketsA is pressed.This keeps bracketsA in place on theloading rail.

X To remove: press release button= onrespective bracketA and remove luggageholder; by pulling upwards and out.

Telescopic rod

The telescopic rod can be used to secure theload against the rear seats to prevent it frommoving around.

X To install: insert one bracket; into boththe left and the right loading rails and slideit to the desired position (Y page 311).

X Insert telescopic rod: into brackets;and, while doing so, press releasebutton? and push the rod downwardsuntil it engages.

X Make sure that locking button= onbrackets; is pressed.This keeps brackets; in place on theloading rail.

X To remove: press release button? onrespective bracket; and removetelescopic rod: by pulling it upwards andout.

Stowage well under the trunk floor(Sedan)! Unhook the handle before again beforeclosing the trunk lid and clip it in securelyto prevent the handle flap from protruding.Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.X To open: pull handle: up.

312 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

EASY-PACK folding floorwith stowagecompartment under the cargocompartment floor (Wagon)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive when the EASY-PACK folding flooris open, objects could be flung around, thusstriking vehicle occupants. There is a risk ofinjury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.Always close the EASY-PACK folding floorbefore a journey.

! Do not apply pressure to the EASY-PACKfolding luggage-compartment floor when itis fully open. You may otherwise damagethe hinges of the EASY-PACK foldingluggage-compartment floor.

! Vehicles with a B&O sound system: do notremove the EASY-PACK folding floor.Removing the EASY-PACK folding floor willcause the cable set or the amplifier to bedamaged because the amplifier module isscrewed to the underside of the EASY-PACK folding floor.

Opening and closing the folding cargocompartment floor

The parts of the EASY-PACK load-securing kitare contained beneath the EASY-PACKfolding floor. Beneath the insert, you will find,for example, the TIREFIT kit or the emergencyspare wheel and the vehicle tool kit.X To open: open the tailgate.X Holding the ribbing, press handle:downwards;.Handle: folds upwards.

X Pull EASY-PACK folding luggage-compartment floor= in the direction ofthe arrow by handle: until it reaches thedesired position and engages in side?.

X To close: disengage the EASY-PACKfolding luggage-compartment floor and pullit back.

X Press the EASY-PACK folding luggage-compartment floor down; until itengages.

Stowage areas 313

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Installing and removing the foldingcargo compartment floor

120° positionX Remove the combined cargo cover and net(Y page 308).

X To remove: move EASY-PACK foldingluggage-compartment floor: into the120° position and lift it upwards.

X To install: push EASY-PACK foldingluggage-compartment floor: to the stop,move it into the 120° position and makesure it engages audibly.

X Pull EASY-PACK folding luggage-compartment floor: forwards.

EASY-PACK rear sill protector(Wagon)! Before closing the tailgate, refasten theEASY-PACK rear sill protector on theunderside of the EASY-PACK foldingluggage-compartment floor.The EASY-PACK rear sill protector couldotherwise be damaged.

The EASY-PACK rear sill protector is attachedto the underside of the EASY-PACK foldingcargo compartment floor by means ofmagnets. It is designed to prevent clothingbecoming stained and the paintwork beingscratched when loading.X Open the EASY-PACK folding luggage-compartment floor (Y page 313).

X Use tab; to detach EASY-PACK rear sillprotector: from the magnets and placeit over the loading sill.

X Close the EASY-PACK folding cargocompartment floor.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the drivingcharacteristics change. If you exceed themaximum roof load, the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steering andbraking, will be greatly impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to thevehicle.

314 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustaindamage even when it is in motion.Ensure that when the roof carrier isinstalled:Ryou can raise the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel fully (depending on the vehicle'sequipment)Ryou can open the tailgate or trunk lid fullyRthe roof carrier does not come intocontact with the antenna

! To avoid damaging or scratching thecovers, do not use metallic or hard objectsto open them.

The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Attaching the roof carrier (Sedan)

Vehicles with a steel roof or sliding sunroof(illustration)

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelX Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers: upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to theanchorage points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Attaching the roof carrier (Wagon)X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Stowage areas 315

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

E 63 AMGX To open: slide cover: back.

All vehicles except E 63 AMGX To open: slide cover= forwards until itengages.

X To remove: slide catch; forwards andpull out cup holder:.

X To insert: insert cup holder: and slideback catch;.

X To close: briefly press cover= at thefront.Cover= moves back.

You can remove the cup holder to clean it.Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.X Press release catch:.Cup holder; folds out forwards.

X Swing the rear seat armrest cover backdown, if necessary.

X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.Swing cup holder; back until it engages.

Bottle holderObserve the "Important safety notes" in the"Stowage compartments" section(Y page 298).

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.

316 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do notprotrude from stowage spaces, parcel netsor stowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard,pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulkyobjects in the trunk/cargo compartment.

! Make sure that any bottles weighingmorethan 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in thebottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. Thebottle holder could otherwise be damaged.

X Press the outer edge of button: and slidein the direction of the arrow until the bottlefits into the opening.

X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with acapacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz.(1.5 l).The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;it merely prevents them from tipping over.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.

Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Additional sun visor= Bracket? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticketA Vanity mirrorB Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into retainer= and mirror coverB has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of retainer=.X Swing sun visor: to the side.

Features 317

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Vehicles with an additional sun visor:slide sun visor: horizontally as desired.

X Fold down additional sun visor; to thewindshield.

Roller sunblinds on the rear sidewindows! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.Do not let it snap back suddenly as thiswould damage the automatic rollermechanism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the rollersunblind hooked in and the side windowsopened simultaneously. The roller sunblindcan jump out of the retainers and springback suddenly when driving at high speeds,e.g. when driving on the freeway. This coulddamage the inertia reel. Therefore, eitherclose the side window or retract the rollersunblind before driving at high speeds.

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab: and hook it onto retainers; at thetop of the window.

Rear window roller sunblind (Sedan)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen extending or retracting, parts of thebody could become trapped within the sweepof the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury.

When extending or retracting, make sure thatno one has any parts of the body within thesweep of the roller sunblind. If someonebecomes trapped, briefly press the buttonagain. The opening or closing procedure willbe stopped.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind canmove freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblindor other objects could be damaged.

Extending/retracting the rollersunblind

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To extend or retract: briefly pressbutton:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly and movesback into the out-of-use position.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing litcigarettes in the ashtray, make sure thatthe ashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise,the stowage space could be damaged.

318 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X To remove the insert: grasp insert= bythe notch at the side and lift it up; andout.

X To re-install the insert: press insert=into the holder until it engages.

X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.The cover moves back.

i You can remove the ashtray insert anduse the resulting compartment forstowage.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: briefly press cover; at the top.The ashtray opens.

X To remove the insert: press releasebutton= and lift the insert up and out.

X To install the insert: install insert: fromabove into the holder and press down intothe holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditionspermit.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.The cover moves back.

Features 319

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).Accessories include such items as lamps orchargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.The cover moves back.

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Briefly press cover; at the top.The cover opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

Socket in the trunk/cargocompartment

Power socket in the trunk (Sedan)

Power socket in the cargo compartment (Wagon)X Lift up the cover of socket:.

320 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

115 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shockif the connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked orreplaced immediately at a qualifiedspecializedworkshop if it is damaged or hasbeen pulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a115 V power socket that is damaged or hasbeen pulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There isa risk of fatal injury.Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notesThe 115 V power socket provides analternating voltage of 115 V so that smallelectronic devices can be connected. Thesedevices, such as games consoles, chargersand laptops, should not consume more thana maximum of 150 watts altogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect hasa suitable connector and conforms to

standards specific to the country you arein.Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedcorrectly into 115 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within apermissible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear and the cargocompartment/trunk are operational(Y page 320).

Using the 115 V power socket

X Open flap=.X Switch on the ignition.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To turn off: disconnect the plug from115 V power socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Features 321

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The warning lamp onthe 115 V power socketis not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 360).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constantnominal power of less than 150 watts, but a very high switch-oncurrent. This device will not work. If you connect such a device,the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable electronic device.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Make sure thatyour system is activated and operational. Tolog in, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and password will be sentto you by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone networkis available for transmitting data to theCustomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

322 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceedas follows:X Press theW orX button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of the audiosystem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, theInoperativeInoperative or Service NotService NotActivatedActivated message appears in themultifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate as

expected. In the event of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of thevehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after anaccidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this orsimilar situations as soon as it is safe to doso. Move to a safe location along with othervehicle occupants. In such situations, securethe vehicle in accordance with nationalregulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Make sure thatyour system is activated and operational. Toregister, press the ï MB Info call button.If any of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.

Features 323

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

General notesAn emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (asdetermined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the CustomerAssistance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more informationon the emergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashescontinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency callmanually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network isunavailable, mbrace will not be able tomake the emergency call. If you leave thevehicle immediately after pressing the SOSbutton, you will not know whether mbraceplaced the emergency call. In this case,always summon assistance by othermeans.

324 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message. The audiooutput is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The COMAND display indicates that a callis active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center can ascertain the nature ofthe problem (Y page 329).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for

your vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiatea roadside assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for RoadsideAssistance call button: is flashingcontinuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on COMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: flashes while the connection isbeing made. The multifunction displayshows the Connecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio system is muted.

Features 325

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The COMAND display indicates that a callis active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about otherproducts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on COMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on the multifunctionsteering wheelRor the corresponding COMAND button forending a telephone call

i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDestination Download gives you access to adata bank with over 15 million Points ofInterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

326 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data transfer ispossible.

i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through thecurrent route section.

Search & Send

General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehiclemust be equipped with mbrace and anavigation system. Additionally, an mbraceservice subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. A destination address which is foundon Google Maps® can be transferred viambrace directly to your vehicle's navigationsystem.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://www.maps.google.com and enter adestination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace

account: click on the correspondingbutton on the website.i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Send" can be foundon the website.

Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select YesYes by turning cVd or slidingXVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidancewith the address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

i If you have sent more than onedestination address, each individualdestination must be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they weresent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benzvehicles withmbrace and activatedmbraceaccounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.

Features 327

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remoteunlocking may be delayed by 15 to60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can nolonger be opened remotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition being

turned off. After this time, the remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be closedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter contacts you and the local lawenforcement agency if the vehicle islocated.

328 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center isautomatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), theCustomer Assistance center can provideimproved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle datais transferred to the Customer Assistancecenter. The customer service representativecan use the received data to decide what kindof assistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicleis called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the RoadsideRoadsideAssistance ConnectedAssistance Connected message in theCOMAND display. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis can be started, theRequest for vehicle diagnosisRequest for vehicle diagnosisreceived. Start vehicle diagnosis?received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.X Confirm the message with YesYes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis PleaseVehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignitionstart ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 159).

X When the Please follow thePlease follow theinstructionsinstructions receivedreceived byby phonephone andandmove your vehicle to a safemove your vehicle to a safeposition.position. message appears, follow thecustomer service representative'sinstructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select CancelCancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceledcompletely.

The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosisactivated.activated. message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the SendSendvehicle diagnostics data//(Voicevehicle diagnostics data//(Voiceconnection may be//interruptedconnection may be//interruptedduringduring datadata transfer)transfer)message appears.The vehicle data can now be sent to theCustomer Assistance center.X Press OKOK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:Transferring data...Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer servicerepresentative agreed with you, the voiceconnection is re-established after the transferis complete. If necessary, you will becontacted at a later time by another means,e.g. by e-mail or phone.Further functions of the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a messageabout various special offers at yourworkshop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oillevel, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receiveinformation on special offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 28).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 24).

Features 329

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by thenavigation system, you will see the <route<routename>name> hashas beenbeen savedsaved toto memorymemory card.card.Do you want to start routeDo you want to start routeguidance?guidance?message in the COMAND display.The route is saved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select NoNo, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in theseparate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by thevehicle, a message will be sent to theCustomer Assistance center. The CustomerAssistance center then forwards thisinformation to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.

The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which wasexceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses theboundaries of the selected areas. You canselect the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areassimultaneously. Different settings arepossible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer servicerepresentative that you wish to activate geofencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger thevehicle's panic alarm via text message. Analarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes. Depending on the setting, the panicalarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards,the alarm switches off.

330 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Garage door opener

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener,persons in the range of movement of thegarage door can become trapped or struck bythe garage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

The HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows youto operate up to three different door and gatesystems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsWhen programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515(free of charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also availableonline at http://www.homelink.com.

i Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 26).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Programming

Programming buttonsObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 331).

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote controlA is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X The first time before programming, clearthe integrated garage door opener memory(Y page 333).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

Features 331

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.i Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote controlAtowards buttons; to? on the rear-viewmirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).i The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might benecessary. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.If indicator lamp: lights up green orflashes, then programming has beensuccessful.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeatthe programming procedure for thecorresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Synchronizing the rolling codeObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 331).Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the program button of the door orgate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"programming of additional remotecontrols").i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button;,= or? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers alsofeature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

332 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.If indicator lamp: turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor drive remote controlA. This canusually be found on the back of the remotecontrol.The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280to 433MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases thelikelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signalto the integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat the

same programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrolA.RNote that some remote controls onlytransmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goesout). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. Thetransmission is halted after a maximum often seconds and indicator lamp: lightsup yellow. Press button;,= or? againif necessary.

Clearing the memoryX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press buttons; and?.The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

X Press and hold buttons; and? until theindicator lamp turns green.

Features 333

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in thefootwell.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat offretainers;.

X Remove the floormat.

334 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Useful information ............................ 336Engine compartment ........................ 336Maintenance ...................................... 340Care .................................................... 341

335

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment,Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRkeep clothing away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injectionsystem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignitionsystem or fuel injection system when theignition is switched on.

G WARNINGHybrid vehicles: be sure to read the "HYBRID"supplement. Otherwise, you could fail torecognize dangers.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.

336 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catchhandle; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 inches (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

RadiatorVehicles with a diesel engine: do not coverthe radiator, for example with a winter frontor bug cover. The readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may otherwise beinaccurate. Some of these readings arerequired by law and must be accurate at alltimes.

Engine oil

General notes

G WARNINGHybrid vehicles: be sure to read the "HYBRID"supplement. Otherwise, you could fail torecognize dangers.

Depending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oilover a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). Theoil consumptionmay be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Engine compartment 337

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine

Example: vehicles with a diesel engineX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt(1.0 liter) engineoil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled nextto the filler neck. Let the engine cool downand thoroughly clean the engine oil off thecomponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to the

338 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

engine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 338).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 422).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized,particularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when thevehicle is on a level surface and the enginehas cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 159).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 159) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fuel

Engine compartment 339

Maintenance

andcare

Z

filler neck when warm, there is enoughcoolant in expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 423).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below therecommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction displayprompting you to add washer fluid(Y page 283).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 424).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 337).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysService A in .. DaysRService A DueService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection witha number or another letter, shows the type ofservice. AA stands for a minor service and BB fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery isdisconnected.

340 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on thesteering wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay has been inadvertently reset, thissetting can be corrected at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This mayotherwise lead to increased wear anddamage to the major assemblies or thevehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle,maintenance work must be carried out morefrequently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequentintermediate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for longperiods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Driving abroadAn extensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solvents

Care 341

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Do not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

! In car washes with a towing mechanism,make sure that the automatic transmissionis in transmission positionN, otherwise thevehicle could be damaged.RVehicles with a SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from theignition lock. Do not open the driver'sdoor or front-passenger door when theengine is switched off. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission selects parkposition P automatically and locks thewheels. You can prevent this by shiftingthe automatic transmission to Nbeforehand.RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position Pautomatically and locks the wheels.

! If the SmartKey is within the reardetection range of KEYLESS-GO, thefollowing situations, for example, couldlead to the unintentional opening of thetrunk lid/tailgate:Rusing a car washRusing a power washerMake sure that the SmartKey is at least6.5 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position N:

342 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and theignition is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 159).Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave theSmartKey in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in allcountries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

! If the SmartKey is within the reardetection range of KEYLESS-GO, thefollowing situations, for example, couldlead to the unintentional opening of thetrunk lid/tailgate:Rusing a car washRusing a power washer

Care 343

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Make sure that the SmartKey is at least6.5 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused byinadequate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitablematerials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs performedat a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

344 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning the

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.

Care 345

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipmentmanufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To open the cover of the rear viewcamera: with COMAND activated, pressthe W button.

X Select SystemSystem by turning cVd theCOMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.

X Select RearRear ViewView CameraCamera and pressW toconfirm.

X Select Open Camera CoverOpen Camera Cover and pressWto confirm.The cover of the 360° camera opens.

X To clean the rear view camera: use clearwater and a soft cloth to clean cameralens:.

Cleaning the 360° camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the 360° camera with a powerwasher.360

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X To open the cover of the 360° camera:with COMAND activated, press the Wbutton.

X Select Syst. settingsSyst. settings by turning cVdthe COMAND controller and pressW toconfirm.

X Select 360° Camera360° Camera and pressW toconfirm.

346 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Select Open Camera CoverOpen Camera Cover and pressWto confirm.The cover of the 360° camera opens.

X To clean the 360° camera: clean cameralens: with clean water and a soft cloth.

i If you drive at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h) or the SmartKey is in position0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the360° camera closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of thefollowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available householdcleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bagdeployment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 347

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to cleangenuine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:RDifferences in the textureRSigns of stretching and markingRSlight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from aqualified specialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather coverswith a clothmoistened with a solution containing1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfibercloth moistened with a solutioncontaining 1% detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sections to avoid leavingvisible lines. Leave the seat to dryafterwards. Cleaning results depend onthe type of dirt and how long it has beenthere.RClean Alcantara® covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the eventof an accident. This poses an increased riskof injury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts

348 CareMaintenance

andcare

by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textilecleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 349

Maintenance

andcare

Z

350

Useful information ............................ 352Where will I find...? ........................... 352Flat tire .............................................. 354Battery (vehicle) ................................ 358Jump-starting .................................... 362Towing and tow-starting .................. 364Fuses .................................................. 367

351

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Where will I find...?

First-aid kit

Sedan: the first-aid kit is in the right-handstowage compartment in the trunk.X Open the trunk lid.X Slide the stowage net down.X Open the stowage compartment.X Release tensioning strap:.X Remove first-aid kit;.

First-aid kit in the stowage net

First-aid kit behind the side trim panel

Wagon: depending on the vehicle'sequipment, the first-aid kit is in the stowagenet or behind the side trim panel.X Open the tailgate.X Open the right-hand side trim panel if thefirst-aid kit is in the side trim panel.

X Remove first-aid kit:.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in thestowage well under the trunk floor/cargocompartment floor. Depending on the vehicleequipment, the vehicle tool kit is on the left-hand side or the right-hand side in the

352 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

stowage well under the trunk floor/cargocompartment floor.

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Example: vehicle tool kit in the left-hand stowagespace: Tire sealant filler bottle; Folding wheel chock= One pair of gloves (under jack)? Tire inflation compressorA Towing eyeB JackC Alignment boltD Fuse allocation chartE Lug wrenchX Open the trunk lid/tailgate.X Sedan: lift up the floor of the trunk(Y page 312).

X Wagon: remove the seat cushions of thefolding bench seat (Y page 114).

Vehicles with a sparewheel/"Minispare" emergency sparewheel

: Vehicle tool kit tray; Stowage well= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency

spare wheelX Open the trunk lid/tailgate.X Sedan: lift up the floor of the trunk(Y page 312).

X Wagon: remove the seat cushions of thefolding bench seat (Y page 114).

The vehicle tool kit contains:Rfolding wheel chockRfuse allocation chartRjackRalignment boltRone pair of glovesRlug wrenchRtowing eye

Where will I find...? 353

Breakdow

nassistance

Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel

: Towing eye; One pair of gloves= Jack? Folding wheel chockA Alignment boltB Sheet for faulty wheelC Tire inflation compressorD Lug wrenchE Fuse allocation chartX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 312).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties) (Y page 354)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 352)Ran emergency spare wheel(Y page 410)Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 395).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 182).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that"normal" level is selected (Y page 204).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 159).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 389).MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure loss

354 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

warning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the displaymessages (Y page 280).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.In addition to the vehicle load, the drivingdistance possible depends upon:RspeedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme drivingconditions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, astandard tire may be used as a temporarymeasure. Make sure that you use theproper size and type (summer or wintertire).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not

feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. whencornering, accelerating quickly and whenbraking. There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Using the TIREFIT kit

TIREFIT sticker, 2-part

Flat tire 355

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, theaccompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tireinflation compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the trunk floor/cargocompartment floor (Y page 352).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull plug?with the cable and hoseA outof the housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tiresealant bottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: headdownwards into recess; of the tireinflation compressor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.

X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket(Y page 320) in your vehicle.Observe the notes on sockets(Y page 320).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Press on/off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise toapproximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflationcompressor during this phase.

X Allow the tire inflation compressor to runfor five minutes. The tire should then haveattained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure reached" (Y page 357).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes, see"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 356).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been achieved after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tirepressuremust be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

356 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.The maximum speed for a tire sealed withtire sealant is 50mph (80 km/h). The upperpart of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed

to the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.

X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,see the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's side B-pillar or tirepressure table on the fuel filler flap).

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release buttonE next topressure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve ofthe sealed tire.

Flat tire 357

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lightingsystem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) orESP® (Electronic Stability Program). Theoperating safety of your vehicle may berestricted. You could lose control of thevehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similarincident, contact a qualified specialistworkshop immediately. Do not drive anyfurther. You should have all work involving the

battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 67) and (Y page 72).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplosive gases of a battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a batteryproduces hydrogen gas. If a short circuitoccurs or sparks are created, the hydrogengas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come intocontact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on abattery.RIt is important that you observe thedescribed order of the battery terminalswhen connecting and disconnecting abattery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.

358 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting anddisconnecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or aspecial collection point forused batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,

electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handlingbatteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron andfaceguard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact aphysician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

HYBRID vehicles: make sure that you readthe "HYBRID" supplement included in the

Battery (vehicle) 359

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

vehicle literature. You could otherwise fail torecognize dangers e.g. due to high voltage.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use batterieswhich have been tested and approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Thesebatteries provide increased impactprotection to prevent vehicle occupants fromsuffering acid burns should the battery bedamaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock. Information on setting theclock can be found in the separateoperating instructions.On vehicles with COMAND and anavigation system, the clock is setautomatically.Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 123).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below freezing point. Whenjump-starting the vehicle or charging thebattery, gases can escape from the battery.There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 362).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 362).

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster donot light up, it is highly likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case,you may neither charge the battery nor jump-

360 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The startingcharacteristicsmay be impaired, especially atlow temperatures. Have the thawed-outbattery checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.Never charge a battery still installed in thevehicle unless a battery charger unitapproved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Abattery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. It permits the charging of thebattery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation and availability. Read the batterycharger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.

Battery (vehicle) 361

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

HYBRID vehicles: make sure that you read the "HYBRID" supplement included in the vehicleliterature. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers e.g. due to high voltage.

362 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaustsystem are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engineis running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.

Jump-starting 363

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from earth pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive clamp; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination couldrollover.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than thepermissible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 416).

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,recover the vehicle with a crane.

364 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stopbutton. Otherwise, the automatictransmission may shift to position P whenthe driver's or front-passenger door areopened, which could lead to damage to thetransmission.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

HYBRID vehicles: make sure that you readthe "HYBRID" supplement included in thevehicle literature. You could otherwise fail torecognize dangers e.g. due to high voltage.It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.If the vehicle has suffered transmissiondamage, have it transported on a transporteror trailer.The automatic transmission must be inposition N when the vehicle is being towed.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition Ni Disarm the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Ypage89). Youcould otherwise be locked out whenpushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. Thereis a risk of burns when removing the rearcover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

Towing eye covers (example: Sedan)

Themountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are at thefront and at the rear, behind the covers.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit (Y page 352).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Take cover: off the opening.X Screw in and tighten the towing eyeclockwise to the stop.

Towing and tow-starting 365

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® couldotherwise damage the brake system.

Only possible for vehicles without4MATIC.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 132).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take theSmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO keywith you.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 364).

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 364).

The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to positionPwhen you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock. In orderto ensure that the automatic transmissionstays in position N when towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthe SmartKey in the ignition lock is inposition 0.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button(Y page 159).

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 132).

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.i When towing with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal a change ofdirection. In this case, only the turn signalsfor the desired direction flash. Afterresetting the combination switch, thehazard warning lamps start flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.

366 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have ittransported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electricalsystemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 362).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 362).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higheramperage, the electric cables could beoverloaded. This could result in a fire. Thereis a risk of an accident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components orsystems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseObserve the important safety notes(Y page 367)X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 182).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it (Y page 159).

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make surethe ignition is switched off (Y page 159).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

Fuses 367

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the trunk/cargo compartmenton the right-hand side of the vehicle, whenviewed in the direction of travel

The fuse allocation chart is located in thevehicle tool kit in the stowage compartmentunder the trunk/cargo compartment floor(Y page 352).

Fuse box in the engine compartmentObserve the important safety notes(Y page 367)

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: remove lines; from the guides.X Move lines; aside. Route the lines behindconnection= to do this.

X Open clamp:.X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.X To close: check whether the rubber seal islying correctly in the cover.

X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse boxinto the retainer.

X Fold down cover and close clamps:.X Secure lines; in the guides.X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunkObserve the important safety notes(Y page 367)

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the trunk lid.

X To open: release cover: at the top rightand left-hand sides with a flat object.

X Open cover: downwards in the directionof the arrow.

368 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Fuse box in the cargo compartment! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the tailgate.

X To open: pull handle: on the cover.X Open the cover downwards.X Swing trim; forwards.

Fuses 369

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

370

Useful information ............................ 372Important safety notes .................... 372Operation ........................................... 372Winter operation ............................... 374Tire pressure ..................................... 376Loading the vehicle .......................... 383All about wheels and tires ............... 387Changing a wheel ............................. 395Wheel and tire combinations ........... 400Emergency spare wheel ................... 410

371

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of anaccident.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information andwarning notices onMOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialistworkshop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 400).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillar(Y page 383)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 176)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 376)

Operation

Information on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If yoususpect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tires

372 OperationWheelsandtires

and wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle.Otherwise, the tires, particularly thesidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. There is a risk ofaccident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention todamage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 373). If necessary, turnthe front wheels to full lock in order to inspectthe inner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 376).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 410).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRdistance covered

Important safety notes on the tiretread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear atdifferent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Operation 373

Wheelsandtires

Z

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once a tread depth ofapproximatelyá in (1.6 mm) has beenreached. If this is the case, the tire is so wornthat it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 354).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at thelatest, regardless of wear.

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 410).

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.

Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 354).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 395).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity significantly, andtherefore traction and braking power as well.Change the tires on your vehicle toM+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibilityfor this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. Thereis a risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanãin (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), usewinter tires or all-weather tires. Both types oftire are identified by the M+S marking.

374 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions.Only these tires will allow driving safetysystems such as ABS and ESP® to functionoptimally in winter. These tires have beendeveloped specifically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.Once the winter tires are mounted:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 379).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tirepressure loss warning system(Y page 380).

X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 380).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 410).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you mustdrive at raised vehicle level if snow chainshave been mounted. The vehicle mayotherwise be damaged.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage to

the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wishto mount snow chains on steel wheels,make sure that you remove the respectivewheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps mayotherwise be damaged.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 400).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon aspossible when you come to a road that isnot snow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriateregulations if you wish to mount snowchains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

i You may wish to deactivate ESP® whenpulling away with snow chains installed(Y page 73). This way you can allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner,achieving an increased driving force(cutting action).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 410).

Winter operation 375

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGTires with tire pressures that are too low ortoo high are associated with the followinghazards:Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle isheavily laden or when driven at highspeeds.Rthe tires can wear excessively and/orunevenly, which can severely impair tiretraction.Rthe driving, steering and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.

There is a risk of accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tirepressure tables are examples. Tirepressure specifications are vehicle-specificand may deviate from the data shown here.The tire pressure specifications that arevalid for your vehicle can be found on theTire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with the emergency sparewheel (Y page 410).

Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 383).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

376 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 389).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tirepressure monitors keep the tire valve open.This can also result in tire pressure loss. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitoringsystem, the tire pressure can be checkedusing the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure 377

Wheelsandtires

Z

The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than1 mile (1.6 km).

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account whenchecking the pressure of warm tires. Onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flapRon the yellow label on the emergency sparewheel (depending on the vehicleequipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low canoverheat and burst as a consequence. Inaddition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impairthe braking properties and the drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe therecommended tire pressure for your vehicle

378 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

when adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 376).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 376).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillar(Y page 383)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 176)Rin the "Tire pressure" sectionRunder "Tire pressure" (Y page 376)

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 376).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it tothe recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down themetal pin in the valve.Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarning by the Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorActive Press 'OK' to RestartActive Press 'OK' to Restart messagewhich appears in the ServiceService menu of themultifunction display. Information on themessage display can be found in the"Restarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem" section (Y page 380).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 376).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Tire pressure 379

Wheelsandtires

Z

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style(cornering at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure losswarning systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side.Additionally, a tire pressure table isattached to the fuel filler flap. The tirepressure loss warning system can only givereliable warnings if you have set the correcttire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressureis set, these incorrect values will bemonitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 376).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button on thesteering wheel to select the TireTirePressurePressure menu.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX When the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK?message appears, press the9or: button to select CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, thevehicle's wheels have sensors that monitorthe tire pressures in all four tires. The tirepressure monitor warns you if the pressuredrops in one or more of the tires. The tirepressure monitor only functions if the correctsensors are installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceService menu of themultifunction display.

380 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Example: current tire pressure display

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressureelectronically" section (Y page 382).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale lights up, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the warninglampwill flash for approximately aminute andthen remain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time thevehicle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 376). Note that the correct tirepressure for the current operating situationmust first be taught-in to the tire pressuremonitor. If there is a substantial loss ofpressure, the warning threshold for thewarning message is aligned to the referencevalues taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure of thecold tires (Y page 383). The currentpressures are saved as new reference values.As a result, a warning message will appear ifthe tire pressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 376).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the

Tire pressure 381

Wheelsandtires

Z

vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating a pressure loss or malfunction.Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights upindicates whether a tire pressure is too low orthe tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, amessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Further information can be found on(Y page 280).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take more than ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tirepressure warning lamp goes out after a fewminutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce the tirepressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressureelectronicallyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 159).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the TireTire pressurespressures willwill bebedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,the system may continue to show the tirepressure of the wheel that has beenremoved for a few minutes. If this occurs,note that the value displayed for theposition where the spare wheel is mountedis not the same as the current tire pressureof the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Correct Tire PressureCorrect Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in at least one tire is too low

382 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

and must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the CheckCheck TiresTiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire MalfunctionWarning Tire Malfunctionmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay, the tire pressure in one or moretires has dropped suddenly and the tiresmust be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 280).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existingwarningmessages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as thereference values for monitoring. In mostcases, the tire pressure monitor willautomatically detect the new referencevalues after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also definereference values manually as described here.The tire pressure monitor then monitors thenew tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the valuerecommended for the correspondingdriving situation on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 376).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 376).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows thecurrent tire pressure for the individual tiresor the Tire pressures will beTire pressures will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR of

Loading the vehicle 383

Wheelsandtires

Z

your vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

B-pillar (example: Sedan): B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed thespecified value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating isvehicle-specific and may differ from that inthe illustration. You can find the validmaximum permissible gross vehicle weightrating for your vehicle on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed to

384 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

travel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "Thecombined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150-lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 385

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure youare using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard (Y page 383).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of theoccupants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

386 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load(maximum grossvehicle weight ratingfrom the Tire andLoading Informationplacard minus thegross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 383).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.Tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors:: tread weargrade,; traction grade and= temperaturegrade. These regulations do not apply toCanada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in NorthAmerica are provided with the correspondingquality grading markings on the sidewall ofthe tire.Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.

All about wheels and tires 387

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 373).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 374).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

388 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 393)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 392)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 391)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 378)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 392)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 389)D Load index (Y page 391)E Tire name

The markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (salesdesignation) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximum speedcould lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is

All about wheels and tires 389

Wheelsandtires

Z

calculated by dividing the tire width by the tireheight.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 383).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 391).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 391).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

Index Speed rating

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"in the size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.The maximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires withmaximum speeds of over 186 mph(300 km/h) must include "ZR", and theservice specification must be given inparentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"indicates that the maximum speed of thetire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask thetire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

390 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.In addition to theM+Smarking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding the tire traction on snow. Theyhave been especially developed for drivingon snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles):130 mph (210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with Performance Package(Wagon): 174 mph (280 km/h)RAMG vehicles with Performance Package(Sedan): 186 mph (300 km/h)

The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 400).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed indexB on the sidewallof the tire (Y page 389).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 391

Wheelsandtires

Z

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 383).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of every tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tire manufacturers orretreaders to informpurchasers of recalls andother safety-relevant matters. It makes itpossible for the purchaser to easily identifythe affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufactureridentification code;, tire size=, tire typecode? and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code:manufacturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 372).

Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers insidewall: and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure.14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and

392 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department ofTransportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which thevehicle is designed multiplied by68 kilograms (150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on the

vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWRas specified on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPacorresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals(kPa) to 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

All about wheels and tires 393

Wheelsandtires

Z

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximumpermissible weight in kilograms or lbs forwhich a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than1 mile (1.6 km).

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rackor a high-performance battery, are notincluded in the curb weight and the weight ofthe accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

394 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by thenumber of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 354) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 354).Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: inthe event of a flat tire, the emergency sparewheel is mounted as described under"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 396).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk ofaccident.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 396).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, ifnecessary, restart the tire pressure losswarning system or the tire pressure monitor.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.

Changing a wheel 395

Wheelsandtires

Z

Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that"normal" level is selected (Y page 204).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 159).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle (Y page 352).

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 352).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level ground (example:Sedan)X On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

396 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients(example: Sedan)X On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising thevehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly, the jack could tip over with thevehicle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.

Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Neverdisengage the parking brake while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle israised.Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid/tailgate when the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

AMG vehicles with Performance Studioequipment: the wheel bolts are covered by ahub cap. Before you are able to unscrew thewheel bolts, you must first remove the hubcap.

Changing a wheel 397

Wheelsandtires

Z

X To remove: turn the center cover of hubcap: counter-clockwise and remove.

X To install: before installing, ensure thathub cap: is in the open position. To doso, turn the center cover counter-clockwise.

X Place hub cap: in position and turn thecenter cover clockwise until you feel andhear hub cap: engage.

X Make sure that hub cap: is installedsecurely.

X Using lug wrench;, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.

Jacking points (example: Sedan)

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: the vehicle has covers installednext to the jacking points on the outer sills toprotect the vehicle body.

Cover, front (example: vehicles with AMG Sportspackage)X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: fold cover= upwards.

X Position jackA at jacking point?.

ExampleX Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

398 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Turn crankB clockwise until jackA sitscompletely on jacking point? and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankB until the tire is raised amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel! AMG vehicles: during removal andrepositioning of the wheel, the wheel rimcan strike the ceramic-brake disc anddamage it. Therefore, take precautions andget a second person to assist you.Alternatively, you can use a secondalignment bolt.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel boltcompletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.

Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the eventof damage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 395).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safetyreasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou only use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! AMG vehicles: during removal andrepositioning of the wheel, the wheel rimcan strike the ceramic-brake disc anddamage it. Therefore, take precautions andget a second person to assist you.Alternatively, you can use a secondalignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Positioning a wheel (example: vehicle with anemergency spare wheel)

Changing a wheel 399

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thealignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

X Vehicles with a collapsible sparewheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 412).Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

! Vehicles with a collapsible sparewheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflatethe collapsible spare wheel with the tireinflation compressor. The wheel rim couldotherwise be damaged.

Tightening the wheel nuts (example: vehicle withan emergency spare wheel)X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once againstanding firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in acrosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: toA). The specifiedtightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the trunk/cargo compartmentagain.

X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: insert the cover into the outersill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newlymounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 376).

i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: allwheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (onlycertain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adversely

400 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

affected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

Overview of abbreviations used in thefollowing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 376).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)

Vehicles with MOExtended tires are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that youadditionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFITkit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit

may be obtained from a qualified specialistworkshop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i On the following pages, you can findinformation on approved wheel rims andtire sizes for equipping your vehicle withwinter tires. Winter tires are not availableat the factory as standard equipment oroptional extras.If you would like to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you may also, incertain circumstances, require rims of theappropriate size. The sizes of the approvedwinter tires may deviate from that of thestandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 401

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

E 250 BlueTEC

Summer tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XLRA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL2

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

All-weather tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

FA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+SRA: 265/40 R18 97 V XL M+S

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

402 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

E 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC

Summer tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

All-weather tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

Wheel and tire combinations 403

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

404 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

E 300 4MATIC

Summer tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

All-weather tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

Wheel and tire combinations 405

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

E 350

Summer tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XLRA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

All-weather tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

406 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

FA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+SRA: 265/40 R18 97 V XL M+S

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

E 350 4MATIC

Summer tiresR184

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

4 Sedan only.

Wheel and tire combinations 407

Wheelsandtires

Z

All-weather tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3, 4

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H XLM+SMOExtended3, 4

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R184

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XLM+SiMOExtended3

BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R184

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressureloss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

4 Sedan only.

408 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

E 550 4MATIC

Summer tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

All-weather tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+S BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 245/40 R18 97 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

E 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC

Summer tiresR19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL5

RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y)XL2, 5FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

Wheel and tire combinations 409

Wheelsandtires

Z

Winter tiresR19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5, 6

RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5, 6, 7

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si5

RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si2, 5

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire typeof the spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted onemergency spare wheels.

General notesYou should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure asnecessary (Y page 376). The applicable valueis found on the wheel or under "Technicaldata" (Y page 414).An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on theemergency spare wheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

i When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressureloss warning system or the tire pressure

5 Observe notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".6 Wagon: maximum permissible speed 220 km/h.7 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted.2 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".

410 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

monitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure loss warningsystem/the tire pressuremonitor when thedamaged wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:after mounting an emergency spare wheel,the system may still display the tirepressure of the removed wheel for a fewminutes. The value displayed for themounted emergency spare wheel is not thesame as the current tire pressure of theemergency spare wheel.

"Minispare" emergency sparewheel/collapsible spare wheel

Opening the stowage wellSedan: the emergency spare wheel can befound in the stowage well under the trunkfloor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 312).Wagon: the emergency spare wheel islocated in the stowage well under the cargocompartment floor.X Remove the seat cushions of the foldingbench seat (Y page 114).

X Lift the cargo compartment floor up.

Removing the emergency spare wheel(Sedan)

Example: Sedan

X Remove vehicle tool kit tray:.X Turn stowage tray; counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel=.

Removing the emergency spare wheel(Wagon)

Example: emergency spare wheelX Remove vehicle tool kit tray: byrecess;.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel=.

Removing the emergency spare wheel(AMG vehicles)

X Reach into cutout: in the tool holder andlift it up.

X Remove collapsible spare wheel;.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 396).

Emergency spare wheel 411

Wheelsandtires

Z

Stowing a used collapsible sparewheel! Only place the collapsible spare wheel inthe vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise,moisture may get into the vehicle.

Take the following steps to stow a usedcollapsible spare wheel. It will not otherwiseinstall into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this workperformed at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrewthe valve insert from the valve and releasethe air.i Fully deflating the tires can take a fewminutes.

X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.X Screw the valve cap back on.X Remove the protective sheet from thevehicle tool kit and pull it over thecollapsible spare wheel.

X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in theemergency spare wheel well under thetrunk.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel usingthe tire inflation compressor beforelowering the vehicle. The wheel rim couldotherwise be damaged.

! Do not operate the tire inflationcompressor for longer than eight minutesat a time without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tire inflation compressor can beoperated again once it has cooled down.

X Mount the collapsible spare wheel asdescribed (Y page 395).The collapsible spare wheel must bemounted before it is inflated.

X Pull connector? and the air hose out ofthe housing.

X Remove the cap from the valve on thecollapsible spare wheel.

X Screw union nut: on the air hose onto thevalve.

X Make sure on/off switchA of the tireinflation compressor is set to 0.

X Insert connector? into the cigarettelighter socket or into a 12 V socket in yourvehicle.Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter(Y page 319). Observe the notes onsockets (Y page 320).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 159).

X Press on/off switchA on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure isshown on pressure gauge=.

X Inflate the tire to the specified tirepressure.The specified tire pressure is printed on theyellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

X When the specified tire pressure has beenreached, press on/off switchA on theelectric air pump to 0.The tire inflation compressor is switchedoff.

412 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock.

X If the tire pressure is higher than thespecified pressure, press pressure releasebutton; until the correct tire pressure hasbeen reached.

X Unscrew union nut: on the air hose fromthe valve.

X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsiblespare wheel valve again.

X Stow plug? and the air hose in the lowersection of the blower housing.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor in thevehicle.

Emergency spare wheel 413

Wheelsandtires

Z

Technical data

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 155/70 R17 110 M8

Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)4.0 B x 17 H28

Wheel offset: 1.34 in (34 mm)

T 155/60 R18 107 M9

Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)4.5 B x 18 H29

Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

AMG vehicles

Collapsible spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

175/50 – 19 97 PTire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)

6.5 B x 19 H2Wheel offset: 0.55 in (14 mm)

8 Not for E 550 4MATIC.9 Not for E 550 4MATIC.

414 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

Useful information ............................ 416Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 416Warranty ............................................ 416Identification plates ......................... 416Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 418Vehicle data ...................................... 426

415

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 26).

Information regarding technical data

General information

G WARNINGHYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you readthe HYBRID Supplemental OperatingInstructions included in your vehicle literatureportfolio. You may otherwise not receive allnecessary safety information and warning forthe operation of your vehicle.

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Information in the printed Operator'sManualIn the printed Operator's Manual you can findinformation about:RVehicle dataRTrunk lid/tailgate opening dimensionsRTank capacityRCoolant (engine)REngine oil approval and capacityRDEF filling capacityRRefrigerant filling capacity and PAG oilRTowing a trailer

Warranty

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed partsin accordance with the following warrantyterms and conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (LemonLaws)

Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. These are availableat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you lose the Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to arrange areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front left-hand door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

416 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicleidentification plate is used only as anexample. This data is different for everyvehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the dataapplicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to itsrearmost position.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 417)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 416)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into thecrankcase)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Identification plates 417

Technicaldata

Z

Service products and fillingcapacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous andhazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel)RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.DEFRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of servicefluids.Components and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)

Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

418 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Tank capacity

Model Totalcapacity

AMG vehicles 66.0 lor

80.0 l

All other models 21.1 US gal(80.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

AMG vehicles Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

All other models Approx.2.4 US gal(9.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop and have thefuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline witha minimum octane rating of 91.

! Only use the fuel recommended.Operating the vehicle with other fuels canlead to engine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)

RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuelrecommended for your vehicle. Do not useadditives. This can otherwise lead to enginedamage. This does not include cleaningadditives for the removal and prevention ofresidue build-up. gasoline may only bemixed with cleaning additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz; see"Additives". You can obtain furtherinformation fromany authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used.If standard premium-grade unleadedgasoline is unavailable and unleadedgasoline of a lower grade is used forrefueling, observe the followingprecautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full withregular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds above 3000 rpm.Rnever refuel using fuel with an octanenumber lower than 87. Otherwise,engine failure could occur.

Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleadedgasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can beused.Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult aqualified specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Service products and filling capacities 419

Technicaldata

Z

Information on refueling (Y page 176).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Complywith the instructions for use on the productlabel. More information aboutrecommended additives can be obtainedfrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usefuel brands that have the additives.The quality of the fuel available in somecountries may not be sufficient. Residuecould build up as a result. In such cases, andin consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed withthe cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512).Youmust observe the notes andmixing ratiosspecified on the container.

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Only use commercially available vehicularULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD,15 ppm maximum sulfur content) thatmeets the ASTM D975 standard. If you donot refuel with ULSD, you may damage theBlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatmentsystem of the vehicle.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles witha diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel withgasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This mayotherwise result in damage to the fuelsystem and engine.

Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult aqualified specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Information on refueling (Y page 176).

Low outside temperaturesi Diesel fuel with improved cold flowproperties is available during the wintermonths. Further information about fuelproperties can be obtained from oilcompanies, e.g. at gas stations.

Flexible Fuel vehicles

Important safety notesG WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

420 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueledwith thefollowing fuel types:Rpremium-grade unleaded gasolineRE85 fuelRa mixture of E85 fuel and premium-gradeunleaded gasoline

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognizedby the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel consumptionThe energy content of E85 fuel is less thanthat of the same amount of premium-gradegasoline. The amount of fuel consumed whenoperating the vehicle with E85 fuel istherefore higher than with premium-gradegasoline.

MaintenanceInform your authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter that you are operating or haveoperated the vehicle with E85 fuel.

Low outside temperaturesIf the outside temperature is below 32 ‡(0 †), the starting procedure can takenoticeably longer when operating with E85fuel.E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outsidetemperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).

DEF

Important safety notesComply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling DEF(Y page 418).DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaustgas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:Rnot poisonousRcolorless and odorlessRnot flammableWhen you open the DEF container, smallamounts of ammonia vapor may be released.Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and areparticularly irritating to the skin, to mucousmembranes and to the eyes. You mayexperience a burning sensation in your eyes,nose and throat. Coughing and watering ofthe eyes are possible.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEFtank only in well-ventilated areas.

Low outside temperaturesDEF freezes at a temperature ofapproximately 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle isdelivered from the factory equipped with aDEF preheating system. Winter operation canthus be guaranteed even at temperaturesbelow 12 ‡ (-11 †).

Additives! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO22241. Do not use additives with DEF anddo not dilute DEF with water. This maydestroy the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.

Purity! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to otherservice products, cleaning agents or dust)lead to:Rincreased emission valuesRdamage to the catalytic converter

Service products and filling capacities 421

Technicaldata

Z

Rengine damageRmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system

Assuring the purity of DEF is particularlyimportant with respect to avoidingmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment system.If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.during repair work, it must not be returned tothe tank. The purity of the fluid can no longerbe guaranteed.

Filling capacities

Model Total capacity

E 250 BlueTECE 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC

6.5 US gal(24.5 l)

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, youmay damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling engine oil(Y page 418).The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

E 300 4MATIC(Canada only)E 350 (USA only)E 350 4MATIC

276 229.5

E 550 4MATIC 278 229.5

AMG vehicles 157 229.5

E 250 BlueTECE 250 BlueTEC4MATIC

651 228.51,229.31,229.51

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

E 550 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

AMG vehicles 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

All other models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

422 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry outregular oil changes using an approved engineoil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 418).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you addantifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is notspilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Service products and filling capacities 423

Technicaldata

Z

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 418).The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant during operation is approximately266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance withMBSpecifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

i The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

E 300 4MATIC(Canada only)E 350 (USA only)E 350 4MATIC

Approx. 10.1 US gal(9.6 l)

E 550 4MATIC Approx. 13.0 US qt(12.3 l)

E 63 AMG 4MATIC Approx. 11.4 US qt(10.8 l)

E 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC

Approx. 11.5 US qt(10.9 l)

E 250 BlueTECE 250 BlueTEC4MATIC

Approx. 11.0 US qt(10.4 l)

i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosioninhibitor/antifreeze.

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

424 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling washer fluid(Y page 418).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MBWinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R-134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant.Otherwise, the climate control system maybe damaged.

Service work, such as topping-up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. All

applicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate controlsystem carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

Warning symbols: indicate:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop

Filling capacities

AMG vehicles Capacity

Refrigerant 22.6 ± 0.4 oz(640 ± 10 g)

PAG oil —

All other models Capacity

Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz(590 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

Service products and filling capacities 425

Technicaldata

Z

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model ::Openingheight

;;

Max.headroom

Sedan(except E 5504MATIC)

69.4 in(1763 mm)

—

E 550 4MATIC —

Wagon 80.6 in(2048 mm)

75.8 in(1925 mm)

AMG vehicles(Sedan)

68.7 in -69.5 in

(1744 mm)-

(1764 mm)

—

AMG vehicles(Wagon)

82.1 in -82.9 in

(2086 mm)-

(2106 mm)

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models (exceptfor AMG vehicles)

Vehicle length,Sedan

192.1 in (4879mm)

Vehicle length,Wagon

193.1 in (4905mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.5 in (2071 mm)

Wheelbase 113.2 in (2874mm)

Turning radius 37.0 ft (11.28 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lbs (100 kg)

426 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

All models (exceptfor AMG vehicles)

Maximum trunkload, Sedan

Maximum trunkload, Wagon

E 300 4MATIC(Canada only)

Vehicle height 58.2 in (1477 mm)

E 350

Vehicle height 58.2 in (1477 mm)

E 350 4MATIC

Vehicle height,Sedan

58.2 in (1477 mm)

Vehicle height,Wagon

59.4 in (1509 mm)

E 550 4MATIC

Vehicle height

E 250 BlueTECE 250 BlueTEC4MATIC

Vehicle height 58.2 in (1477 mm)

All models (onlyAMG vehicles)

Vehicle length,Sedan

192.9 in (4900mm)

Vehicle length,Wagon

193.4 in (4912mm)

All models (onlyAMG vehicles)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.5 in (2071 mm)

Wheelbase 113.2 in (2874mm)

Maximum roof load 220 lbs (100 kg)

E 63 AMG

Vehicle length, Sedan 192.6 in(4892 mm)

Vehicle length, Wagon 193.0 in(4904 mm)

Vehicle height, Sedan 57.1 in(1450 mm)

Vehicle height, Wagon 59.1 in(1502 mm)

E 63 AMG 4MATIC

Vehicle length, Sedan 192.6 in(4892 mm)

Vehicle length, Wagon 193.0 in(4904 mm)

Vehicle height, Sedan 57.7 in(1466 mm)

Vehicle height, Wagon 59.9 in(1522 mm)

E 63 AMG S-MODEL

Vehicle length, Sedan 192.9 in(4900 mm)

Vehicle length, Wagon 193.4 in(4912 mm)

Vehicle data 427

Technicaldata

Z

E 63 AMG S-MODEL

Vehicle height, Sedan 57.1 in(1450 mm)

Vehicle height, Wagon 59.1 in(1502 mm)

E 63 AMG 4MATIC S-MODEL

Vehicle length, Sedan 192.9 in(4900 mm)

Vehicle length, Wagon 193.4 in(4912 mm)

Vehicle height, Sedan 57.7 in(1466 mm)

Vehicle height, Wagon 59.9 in(1522 mm)

428 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata